Gent PDF

by Honeywell
Generic Commissioning Instructions

for Vigilon 4/6 loop & Compact range of fire panels & network nodes
7
E
SU
IS
4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.
Commissioning instructions
How to configure the 'U' buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 33

Contents Factory settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 33
How to fit the outer door - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 33
Preliminary information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 Vigilon Compact Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34
Safety information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 Cards and internal cables of the panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 35
Pre-visit checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 Installing a replacement MCB in an older Vigilon Compact panel - - - - - - - 36
Pre-commissioning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 Terminals on the Master Control Board (MCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 37
Points to remember - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7 Settings on the DKC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 38
A typical commissioning process- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 Pre Power up checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 39
Product Approval and Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11 Battery Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 39
Fire detection and alarm control panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11 Mains supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40
Interface Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11 How to configure the monitored input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 41
Manual Call points - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11 Fire Routing LEDs (post mid 2015) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 42
S-Cubed Mark 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12 How to configure the LEDs CB253 and CB254 (pre mid 2015) - - - - - - - - 42
S-Quad Sensors with Visual alarm device (VAD) - introduced post April 2014 - 13 How to configure the U1 and U2 buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 43
S-Quad Sensors (Legacy product range) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 15 External printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 43
S-Cubed Mark 2 (Legacy product range) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 16 Factory settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 44
Fire Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 17 Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Panel - (legacy product) - - - - - - - 45
Vigilon 4/6 loop panels (EN/BS) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 17 Cards and internal cables of the panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 46
Vigilon Compact Panel (EN) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 17 Terminals on the Audio Control Card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 47
Vigilon Compact VA panel (EN) (Legacy panel) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 17 Terminals on the Master Control Board- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 48
Controls and indications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 18 Pre power up checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 48
Battery Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 49
Vigilon 4/6 loop Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23
Mains supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
Second fix parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23
External printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
Remove the protective covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23
How to configure the monitored input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
Fitting the inner door - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 24
How to configure the buttons U1 and U2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
Printer paper roll - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25
How to configure LEDs CB253 and CB254 (Legacy) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
Setting the DKC card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 26
How to check and set the audio signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51
Card installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 27
Factory settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51
Terminals on Terminal Card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 28
Pre power-up checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 29 Indications on power up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
Mains supply wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 29 Initial tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
Battery installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 30 Useful menu options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53
Contents
PSU LED indications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 31 Panel Buzzer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53

Write protect link on backplane - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 31 Software version check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53
Fire Routing LEDs (Post Mid 2015) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 32
Command Build LEDs CB253 and CB254 (Pre Mid 2015) - - - - - - - - - - 32
2 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

Vigilon 4/6 loops & Compact (VA) panels & network nodes
Password or PIN code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53 Device checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 68

How to create an Engineer PIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 54 Checking the time averages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 68
How to change the Customer PIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 54 Checking the Exception/Subfault codes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 70
How to erase a PIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 54 Condition Codes for S-Quads (Exception / Sub Fault codes) - - - - - - - - - 71
Address allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55 Pre Fire, Fire and Super fire - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 72
Address allocation with Loop circuit end 1 connected - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55 S-Quad Sensor with VAD - STATES VAD (current range of devices) 73
Allocation faults - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56 S-Quad Sensor with Strobe - STATES (legacy devices) - - - - - - - 74
How to re-allocate addresses to a loop circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56 S-Quad Heat sensor STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75
Address allocation with Loop circuit End 2 connected - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56 S-Quad Dual Optical & Heat / Optical & Heat sensor STATES - - - - - - - - 75
Plexus Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56 S-Quad Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 76
SAFE Addressing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57 S-Quad Optical sensor STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 76
To SAFE address a device - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57 Beam sensor STATES- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 77
To convert from SAFE to soft address - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57
Interface Unit STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 78
Checking a loop map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58 Single channel interface input STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 78
To find devices on a loop circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58 4 - Channel Interface Unit STATES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 78
Non Volatile Memory (NVM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 59 34000 range of sensors STATES (legacy devices)- - - - - - - - - - 79
NVM Hardware Write protect - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 59 Optical heat sensor (plus sounder) STATES (34000 range) - - - - - - - - - - 79
NVM Software - 'write protect' and 'unprotect' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 60 Heat sensor STATES (34000 range) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 80
To back up loop data to NVM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 60
To recover loop data from NVM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 61
Installed equipment tests- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
Preparation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
How to electrically erase the NVM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 61
Communication to site occupants - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
2km Loop circuit - tests using LDT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 Commissioning Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
Loop diagnostic tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 Plant equipment- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
How to [Repair] a loop circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 Zone 'Test' mode (for EN panels only) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
Loop resistence measured by the panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 'Commission' mode (for BS panels only) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
1km Loop circuit - manual tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 Fire Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 82
Loop resistance and capacitance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 Manual Call Points - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 82
Loop circuit tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63 Interface Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 82
Loop short circuit test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63 S Cubed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83
Ground break test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63 Repeat panel (Loop connected) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83
Positive line break test- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64 Mimic Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83
Earth fault test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64 Mains powered DAU and micro DAU (Legacy devices) - - - - - - - - - - - - 83
Contents
Checking device STATUS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65 VIGILON Compact VA system (Legacy system) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83
Loop Device Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65 Deviations from standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83
Plexus Device Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 67
4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 3

Vigilon Compact Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 84 Appendix C - Guidelines for standalone system commands - - - - - 139
Single Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 84 Labels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 139
Wiring the single network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 85 Long labels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 140
Single network without domain bridge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 85 Sectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 143
Network Card for VIGILON Compact - baud and node address switch settings - 86 Integral sounder operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 144
Powering-up the Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 87 Default fire plan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 145
How to check a Network map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 87 Fail safe fire plan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 145
How to check Network Card status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 88 Site specific fire plan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 145
Fault Finding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 88 Delay Blocks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 146
High errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 88 Sound and Resound alarms options- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 148
Single Vigilon Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 89 Time slots and Time blocks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 149
Single Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 89 Zones - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 150
Wiring a Copper network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 90 Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 150
Wiring a Fibre network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 90 Zone Tasks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 151
Single network without domain bridge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 91 Command Builds - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 152
Powering-up the Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 91 Sounders Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 153
How to check a Network map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 91 Auxiliary Relays - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 154
How to check Network Card status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 92 Radio Device - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 154
Fault Finding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 92 Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 155
High errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 92 Fire Protection Equipment (FPE)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 156
S-Cubed Mark III or II and S-Quad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 157
Multiple Vigilon Networks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 93
Voice and Sounder mode pluse VAD/Strobe action - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 158
Domain Bridge using Input Output card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 93
Two networks using Domain bridge IO card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 93 Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked system commands - - - - - 159
Star network using Domain bridge IO cards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 93 Master Sectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 159
IO domain bridge network switch settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 94 Master Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 160
Message routing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 95 Appendix E - Cards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 161
Domain bridge message passing tests- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 96
Domain bridge using Fibre Optic network card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 96
FO Domain Network switch settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 97
Appendix A-1 - Menu maps for EN54 (V4) Vigilon panel - - - - - - 98
Appendix A-2 - Menu maps for BS (V3+) Vigilon panel - - - - - - 107
Appendix B - Message Action List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116
Clearable fault events - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116
Contents
Latching fault events - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116

Repairable fault events - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116
Message Action list - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 117

Preface Abbreviations
This is the seventh issue of the Commissioning instructions for the fire alarm system based on the ACC Audio Control Card Mpeg Moving picture expert
EN54/BS Vigilon 4/6 loop panels, Vigilon Compact panel (&VA) (with network capability) group
and Vigilon Network nodes. This manual covers EN panels having Master Control Card / Master ADC Analogue to digital
Control Board software at version 4.53 or higher and BS panels having Master Control Card converter N/C or NC Normally closed
software at version 3.97 or higher. It also covers FARE, FPE and Part 23 devices. C Common N/O or NO Normally open
CH channel NVM Non Volatile Memory
Associated documents (CARD14)
CO Carbon monoxide
The Vigilon control panels and network nodes are supplied with respective copies of the operating O/C or OC Open circuit
DAU Distributed Amplifier Unit
and installation instruction manuals: PA Public Address
EN54 Vigilon 4/6-loop panel based system - Installation instructions & Operating instructions DEV Device
EN54 Vigilon Compact panel based system - Installation instruction & Operating instructions PCB Printed circuit board
DIL Dual in line
EN54 Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm panel - Installation instructions & Operating instructions PIN Personal identification
DKC Display keyboard card
Vigilon Compact Network node - Installation instructions number
Vigilon Network Node - Installation instructions DPCO Double pole change over (usercode, password,
Commissioning tool - User guide (relay contacts) access code)
EEPROM Electrically Erasable PSU Power supply unit
Conventions Programmable ROM
PTT Press to Talk
EOL End of line
"
PVC Polyvinyl chloride
FAB First action byte
QB Quick blow (fuse)
This is a note to highlight important text that is normally hidden in the main text. IO or I/O Input Output channels
S/C or SC Short circuit
IP Ingress protection
SAB Second action byte
&
LED Light emitting diode
SAFE Software addressed
This is either a caution to prevent damage to the equipment or a LRT Loop Radio Transceiver firmware encoded
warning to inform of dangerous conditions that may result in injury or death. LPC Loop processor card SPCO Single pole change over
LPCB Loss prevention council relay contacts
Symbol Keys certification board SPL Sound pressure level
MCB Master control board T Anti-surge (fuse)
(CARD 0)
USB Universal serial bus
What you will see. MCC Main control card or Main
VA Voice Alarm
controller card (CARD 0)
MCP Manual call point
What you will hear.

Pre-visit checks
Preliminary information
¨ Ensure there are accurate as fitted wiring drawings available, 2 copies are required.
34K Control Panels ¨ Any damaged equipment has been noted for replacement.
¨ Ensure access will be provided to system equipment installed in the protected
This manual covers the Vigilon range of control premises.
panels and does not specifically cover the ¨ The installer (electrical contractor) will be in attendance until the installation is
34K 4-Loop Control Panel. proved.
¨ Site contact or representative will be available during the visit.
¨ Ensure the commissioning tool along with the associated cables, printer and
For information on 34K 4-Loop Control panel refer instructions are available.
to Vigilon BS 4-Loop Control panel in this manual, ¨ Ensure spare parts are available, such as:
as both ranges of panels have version 3+ software • MCP glasses
and the only difference is in the branding. • MCP test key
• Printer paper roll
Safety information • Equipment door keys.
&
1. Do not remove or replace printed circuit boards, fuses or attempt to wire the
Pre-commissioning
¨ Check the installation of fire alarm equipment with reference to the most recent as
fitted wiring drawings.
control panel with the panel powered up. Always power down the mains supply
at the fused spur unit and disconnect the battery supply to the panel. ¨ Get the feel of the operating condition of areas on the site:
• action the installer to carry out any rectification work plus
2. When powering up always power-up the mains supply first before the battery • report discrepancies for administration purposes.
¨ Where the operating condition of an area is not right for the equipment installed, then
supply. The power-down should be done in reverse order.

the appropriate replacement action must be taken.
3. When installing the cards into the master control board or backplane always ¨ Ensure the fire system equipment is installed in accordance with the appropriate
use anti-static work procedures. standards and project specification.
4. Do not use anti-static procedures on live equipment.

Points to remember ¨ Sealed lead acid battery can have a useful life of up to 5 years from the date of
manufacture, it is strongly recommended that batteries are replaced after 4 years. The
Earth leads batteries must be disposed of correctly by following national or local legislation and
¨ All earth leads supplied with the system equipment must be securely fitted to battery manufacturers recommendations.
maintain earth continuity.
Powering up
Parts for later installation ¨ When equipment is being powered up always connect the mains supply before the
¨ All unused parts should be retained in their respective container for safe keeping until battery supply. Power-down should be done in reverse order.
required.
Loop wiring
¨ The loop cable should have been connected to the appropriate terminals at each & Arcing may occur when the battery circuit is connected to mains
powered equipment.
device, as shown in the installation manual in locations identified on the as fitted
wiring drawings. Panel Buzzer
Enclosure ¨ It may be necessary during commissioning to switch Off the panel buzzer. It is
¨ Access into equipment enclosure is usually by means of opening an outer door/cover. possible to selectively switch the disablement, fault, fire, supervisory and command
A panel may also have an inner door which will also need opening. build buzzer sound to Off or On. It is important to ensure that the buzzer is switched
On for normal operation after commissioning.
Unattended equipment
Fire plan
¨ Where equipment is to be left unattended, then it is important to close the door /cover
for safety. ¨ The system should be tested in accordance with the project specification.
Copper fingers Sensor cover
¨ Copper fingers are conductive spring like strips fitted to metal assemblies. They are ¨ Each fire sensor installed in the system should have been fitted with a dust cover
fitted to shield against electromagnetic and radio frequency interferences. during installation. The dust covers must be removed from all the fire sensors after the
Ensure the copper finger strips are intact and no damage has occurred. Damaged panel loops have been satisfactorily powered-up and with addresses allocated to each
fingers will reintroduce the gap to let in/out interferences. device ready for further checks and tests.
Static precaution Site specific installation
¨ The discharge of static electricity can damage or degrade sensitive electronic ¨ Plant equipment interfaced to the system should be tested to recommendations made
components on printed circuit boards. Anti-static procedures should be followed in the project specification.
when handling static sensitive boards. Test mode (EN - V4) & Commission Mode (BS - V3+)
¨ During commissioning of the system you will need to switch On the Test/Commission
&
It is important that anti-static procedures are NOT carried out on live equipment.
mode. It is important to switch Off the Test/Commission mode after the work is over,
to ensure the system operates normally.
Informing responsible persons
Removal and disconnection ¨ It is important to inform the person(s) responsible for the fire alarm system that
¨ Any disconnection of cables or removal of parts from an assembly must be restored or the system is being commissioned.
replaced.
Battery
¨ To prevent damage to batteries and equipment, the terminals of the battery must not
simultaneously touch any conductive part of the equipment enclosure.

A typical commissioning process

Always power-down the panel when working on the system, Initial tests and set ups
for example when wiring or replacing parts. – Setup Access levels PIN codes, if required
– Carry out a display test and ensure DISPLAY and LEDs are working
Pre visit checks – Set the system clock time and date
Ensure you have: – Configure the RS232 printer port, if an external printer is installed.
– As-fitted-drawings that shows installed system equipment
– Access will be available to protected areas having system equipment
– Installer will be present to rectify wiring faults Loop Devices
– Tools and spare parts are available. – Configure the links on all LV 4-channel interface units connected to
the loop. Ensure links are set for either Input or Output application.
Inform responsible person(s) Ensure all interface Input/Output external wiring remains
Inform responsible person(s) that the fire alarm system is being disconnected at this stage, unless otherwise instructed. This
commissioned and occupants in the protected premises will hear action will prevent inadvertent operation of output/plant while
test alarms. the system is being commissioned.
Ensure occupants are made aware of alternative site procedures
should there be a fire event while the system is commissioned. – Power up the mains powered interface unit on the loop.
Survey the installation Loop device address allocation

– Connect only End 1 of a loop circuit and power-up the loop
Refer to the most recent as-fitted-drawings and ensure that all the fire
system equipment has been installed in accordance with the – Allow address allocation to finish. Any fault(s) on the loop during
installation instructions, respective standards and project specification. allocation must be rectified. Power-down the loop when correcting
loop wiring faults and the power-up to continue address allocation
– Connect only End 2 of the loop circuit and power cycle the loop and
Before powering up the Panel ensure address allocation is complete from End 2.
Open the outer cover and inner cover of the panel and: – Connect both End 1 and End 2 of the loop and check the loop
– Check all the internal cables within the enclosure are securely fitted allocation is complete with both ends of the loop connected.
– Fit the loop card(s) into the required location(s) – ‘Starting Loop n’ displayed after successful allocation of addresses.
– Ensure no external circuits are connected at this stage, except for – Check all the devices on the loop circuit are installed in their correct
the mains supply which must be connected but not switched ON location using the ‘Find Device’ function at the panel and by referring
– Fit the end of line resistors to the master alarm circuits. to the ‘as fitted wiring drawings’
– Connect the external printer to the RS232 port, if required. – Check to ensure correct devices are installed by viewing the
– Ensure the input - output lines of interface units on the loop are not ‘Device status’
connected. – Repeat the allocation process on other loop circuits.
Pre-allocate the wireless devices
Devices
Power up
– If the system has wireless devices then pre-allocate the
Radio
– Fit the batteries inside the panel enclosure and connect the battery
wireless devices and bind them to the respective LRT.
leads and then switch ON the mains supply.
Then allocate loop again to allow panel to see the devices.
Continue on next page

From previous page
Configure the system using the Commissioning Tool

Backup Configure the system to site specific requirement using the
Back-up the system loop address allocation data to the memory. Commissioning tool.
Regularly back-up the configuration data during
commissioning, do this every 15 minutes to ensure the
changes made to the configuration is not lost. Transmit the configured system to the panel
Connect the commissioning tool to the panel and transmit the
system configuration.
Loop wiring tests
Carry out tests on each loop wiring by introducing open and short Beam Sensor alignment
circuit wiring faults. Ensure the panel provides an indication of each If there are beam sensors on the loop then commission the beam
fault. Run the ‘Repair’ function at the panel after each wiring fault removal. sensor pair using the alignment and autogain function at the panel.
Procedures for Vigilon Compact VA only

Audio loop wiring tests Installed system test
Connect each audio loop and carry out tests to ensure live and Put the panel in test mode and then carry out tests in accordance with
auxiliary messages are outputted to the DAU speaker circuits. the recommendations of BS5839:Part 1 and also in accordance
with project requirements:
Background music and PA microphone – Interface units

– Connect and test Background music system Prior to carrying out functional test on external equipment connected

– Connect and test PA microphone to the I/O circuits, ensure the I/O circuits remain isolated.
– Test the emergency microphone. After functional tests, reconnect the I/O circuits and where appropriate
test the I/O circuits to project recommendations.
– Fire sensors
Devices set up Ensure a device fire causes alarms in the system to sound in
Ensure all devices on the loop circuits are correctly set up. accordance with site specific requirement.
– Calibrate speaker circuits on micro DAUs – S-Cubed - The output volume of an S-Cubed can be adjusted using:
– Adjust volume of audio at each micro DAU and [Set up] ->[Setup]-> [Device]-> [Loop]->[S-Cubed]->[Volume] and then
Mains Powered DAU. enter a value between 16 min to 100 max. command at the panel.
– Repeat and Mimic panels
Check events are displayed and indicated
– Connect Master alarm and Monitored input circuits and move the
Retrieve the system data to Commissioning tool end-of-line resistor to the end of each circuit.
Connect the commissioning tool and retrieve the system data, – Sounders - Conduct sound level tests to ensure the levels do not fall
see Commissioning tools manual. below the requirements.
– VAD / Strobe - Check the appropriate S-Quad and S-Cubed devices
provide the visual alarm.
– Messages - Check the correct messages are announced from the
Speakers, S-Cubed and S-Quad devices where installed.
– Remove the Test mode and ensure any disablements are re-enabled.
Continued on next page

From previous page
PIN Codes
Change the user PIN code(s) and inform the new codes to the
respective users.
Final changes to configuration

Use the panel menu options to make minor adjustments if required to
the system configuration and then back up the work. All major changes
to the configuration must be done using the Commissioning tool.
Configuration data file

Ensure site file held at the Commissioning tool is the same as the
one held at the panel for future reference and for traceability.

Product Approval and Standards

Fire detection and alarm control panel
The following fire detection and alarm control panels are LPCB approved.
Product number Description Standard
VIG1-24 EN Vigilon 4-loop panel EN 54 Parts 2 & 4
VIG1-72 EN Vigilon 4/6-loop panel
COMPACT-24-N EN Vigilon Compact 2-loop panel
COMPACT-VA EN Vigilon Compact VA 2-loop panel EN 54 Parts 2, 4 & 16. - a Legacy panel
Interface Units
The following interface units are LPCB approved.
S4-34410 1 Input interface module (loop powered) EN54-17:2005 and
S4-34450 4 Input / output Interface module (loop powered) EN54-18:2005
S4-34420 1 Output & 1 input (confirmation) interface module (loop powered)

S4-34415 1 Output Interface
S4-34411 Single output interface (loop powered)
S4-34401 Single Channel Mains Switching Interface
S4-34404 Four Channel mains Switching Interface
S4-34440-02 and Mains Powered Interface Units EN54-17: 2005
S4-34440-12 EN54-18: 2005 &
EN54-4:1997 + A1: 2002 + A2: 2006
Manual Call points

The following manual call points are LPCB approved.
S4-34842 Manual Call Points EN54 Part 11: 2001
S4-34805 EN54 Part 17: 2005
S4-34485
S4-34800

S-Cubed Mark 3
The following S-Cubed Mark 3 devices are LPCB approved.

Type A Devices
S3-S-R S3 Sounder/Red Body EN54-3 : 2001, A1:2002, A2:2006 (for Sounder)
S3-V-R S3 Voice Sounder/Red Body EN54-23 : 2010 (for Visual Alarm Device VAD)
S3-S-W S3 Sounder/White Body EN54-17 : 2005 (for Short circuit isolator)
S3-V-W S3 Voice Sounder/White Body
S3-VAD-HPW-R S3 VAD/High Perf. White VAD/Red body

S3-VAD-HPR-R S3 High Perf. Red VAD/Red Body
S3-S-VAD-HPW-R S3 Sounder/High Perf. White VAD/Red Body

S3-S-VAD-HPR-R S3 Sounder/High Perf. Red VAD/Red Body
S3-S-VAD-HPW-W S3 Sounder/High Perf. White VAD/White Body
S3-S-VAD-HPR-W S3 Sounder/High Perf. Red VAD/White Body
S3-S-VAD-LPR-R S3 Sounder/Standard Perf. Red VAD/Red Body

S3-S-VAD-LPW-R S3 Sounder/Standard Perf. White VAD/Red Body
S3-V-VAD-HPW-R S3 Voice Sounder/High Perf. White VAD/Red Body

S3-V-VAD-HPR-R S3 Voice Sounder/High Perf. Red VAD/Red Body
Environmentally protected Devices

S3EP-S-R S3 Sounder/Red Body/EP EN54-3 : 2001, A1:2002, A2:2006 (for Sounder)
S3EP-VAD-HPW-R S3 VAD/High perform. White VAD/Red Body/EP EN54-23 : 2010 (for Visual Alarm Device VAD)
S3EP-VAD-HPR-R S3 VAD/High perform. Red VAD/Red Body/EP EN54-17 : 2005 (for Short circuit isolator)
S3EP-V-VAD-HPW-R S3 Voice Sounder/High perform. White VAD/Red Body/EP
S3EP-V-VAD-HPR-R S3 Voice Sounder/High perform. Red VAD/Red Body/EP

S-Quad Sensors with Visual alarm device (VAD) - introduced post April 2014
The following S-Quad with VAD sensors when operating in the STATES shown in table below are LPCB approved to the respective standard.
Part number Description Standard
S4-711-VAD-HPR S4 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors / Red VAD EN54-5 : 2000, A1 : 2002 (heat)
S4-720-V-VAD-HPR S4 Heat sensor / Voice Sensor Sounder / Red VAD EN54-7 : 2000, A1 : 2002, A2 : 2006 (optical)
EN54-3 : 2001, A1 : 2002, A2 : 2006 (sounder)
S4-711-V-VAD-HPR S4 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors / Voice Sounder / Red VAD EN54-23 : 2010 (visual alarm device VAD)
S4-911-V-VAD-HPR S4 Dual Optical & Heat & CO Sensors / Voice Sounder / Red VAD EN54-17:2005 (short circuit isolator)
EN54-18:2005 (input output devices)
S4-711-VAD-LPW S4 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors / White VAD
S4-711-VAD-HPW S4 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors / White VAD (HP)
S4-711-V-VAD-LPW S4 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors / Voice Sounder / White VAD (Std)
S4-711-V-VAD-HPW S4 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors / Voice Sounder / White VAD (HP)
S4-720-V-VAD-HPW S4 Heat / Voice Sounder / White VAD (HP)
S4-911-V-VAD-HPW S4 Dual Optical & Heat & CO Sensors / Voice Sounder / White VAD HP
Non VAD devices
S4-720 Heat sensor EN54 : Part 5 :2002* - (heat)

S4-715 Optical sensor EN54 : Part 7 : 2000* - (optical smoke)
S4-710 Optical Heat sensors EN54 : Part 7 : 2000* - (optical smoke)
S4-711 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors EN54 : Part 5 : 2000* - (heat)
CEA 4021 : 2003-07 Class P heat multisensor detector
S4-711-V S4 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors / Voice Sounder EN54-5 : 2000, A1 : 2002 (heat)
S4-770-S S4 Optical & Heat Sensors / Sounder EN54-7 : 2000, A1 : 2002, A2 : 2006 (optical)
EN54-3 : 2001, A1 : 2002, A2 : 2006 (sounder)
S4-771-S S4 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors / Sounder EN54-17:2005 (short circuit isolator)
S4-780-S S4 Heat Sensor Sounder EN54-18:2005 (input output devices)
S4-901 S4 Dual Optical & Heat & CO Sensors
* - these standards are met when the sensor is operating LPCB approved STATES, see STATES table below. Sounder tone description - see next page
" If a S-Quad sensor is configured to operate a non LPCB STATE, then this will contravene the LPCB approval. The required STATE is configured during commissioning and
can be also configured using controls at the main panel.

LPCB approved S-Quad Sensor with VAD device STATES

# - factory default settings LPCB approved STATE Meets ~ EN54-7 : 2000, A1:2002, A2:2006
Device * EN54-5 : 2000, A1:2002
Dual Optical & Heat sensor variant - S4-711
STATE 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *
(With VAD) S4-711-VAD-HPR
(With VAD) S4-711-VAD-LPW STATE 5 Medium optical smoke ~ / Class B heat *
(With VAD) S4-711-VAD-HPW
STATE 8 Delayed medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat*
(With Speech) S4-711-V
(With VAD & Speech) S4-711-V-VAD-HPR

(With VAD & Speech) S4-711-V-VAD-HPW
(With Sounder) S4-771-S

Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor variant- S4-901
(With Speech & VAD) S4-911-V-VAD-HPR
(With Speech & VAD) S4-911-V-VAD-HPW STATE 9 Class A1 heat *
Optical & Heat sensor variant - S4-710

(With Sounder) S4-770-S STATE 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat*
Heat sensor variant - S4-720
STATE 0 # Class A1 heat *
(With Speech & VAD) S4-720-V-VAD-HPR
(With Speech & VAD) S4-720-V-VAD-HPW STATE 5 Class B heat *

Optical sensor - S4-715 State 0 # Medium optical smoke
All S-Quad range of sensor sounder devices meet EN54-17:2005 Input/Output devices plus EN54-18:2005 Short circuit isolation for use on the transmission path of fire detection and alarm systems.
Sounder tone - Meets the following tone settings: High tone ( Continuous 933Hz) & Alternate tone (High 933Hz for 0.25s / low 700Hz for 0.25s)
When an S-Quad sensor is configured to operate a non LPCB approved STATE then this will contravene the LPCB approval.
# - these standards are met when the sensor is operating LPCB approved STATES.
All the LPCB approved STATES applicable to S-Quad fire sensors are shown. The required STATE is configured during commissioning. On initial power-up of the system all the sensors operate in
STATE 0.
Note sensor STATES are not applicable for wireless sensors.

S-Quad Sensors (Legacy product range)

The following S-Quad sensors when operating in the STATES shown in table below are LPCB approved to the respective standard.
S4-720-ST-VO Heat sensor Strobe and Speech (Speech and Strobe - no approval) EN54 : Part 5 :2002* - (heat)
S4-780 Heat Sensor plus Sounder EN54 : Part 5 : 2002* - (heat)
S4-780-ST Heat Sensor plus Sounder & Strobe (Strobe - no approval) EN54 : Part 3 : 2001 - (sounder)
S4-711-ST Dual Optical & Heat Sensors Strobe (Strobe - no approval) EN54 : Part 7 : 2000* (optical smoke)
S4-911 Dual Optical, Heat & CO Sensors (CO - no approval) EN54 : Part 5 : 2002* (heat)
CEA 4021 : 2003-07 Class P heat multisensor detector
S4-711-ST-VO Dual Optical & Heat Sensors, Speech & strobe (Speech and Strobe - no approval) EN54 : Part 7 : 2000* (optical smoke)
S4-711-VO Dual Optical & Heat Sensors, Speech (Speech - no approval) EN54 : Part 5 : 2002* (heat)
EN54 : Part 3 2001 - (sounder tone)
S4-771 Dual Optical & Heat Sensors & Sounder CEA 4021 : 2003-07 Class P heat multisensor detector
S4-911-ST-VO Dual Optical, Heat & CO Sensors, Speech & Strobe
(Speech, Strobe & CO - no approval)
S4-770 Optical & Heat sensors and Sounder
* - these standards are met when the sensor is operating LPCB approved STATES, see STATES table below. Sounder tone description - see next page

" If a S-Quad sensor is configured to operate a non LPCB STATE, then this will contravene the LPCB approval. The required STATE is configured during commissioning and
can be also configured using controls at the main panel.

LPCB approved S-Quad Sensor STATES (Legacy product range)
LPCB approved STATE Meets ~ EN54 : Part 7 :2000

Device # - default STATE * EN54 : Part 5 :2002
Dual Optical & Heat sensor variant -
(With Strobe) S4-711-ST STATE 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *
(With Speech) S4-711-VO
(With Strobe & Speech) S4-711-ST-VO STATE 5 Medium optical smoke ~ / Class B heat *
(With Sounder) S4-771
STATE 8 Delayed medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat*
Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor variant - STATE 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *
S4-911
(With Speech & Strobe) S4-911-ST-VO STATE 9 Class A1 heat *
Optical & Heat sensor variant -

(With Sounder) S4-770 STATE 0 # Medium optical smoke / Class A1 heat*
Heat sensor variant -
(With Speech & Strobe) S4-720-ST-VO STATE 0 # Class A1 heat *

(With Strobe) S4-780-ST STATE 5 Class B heat *
All S-Quad range of sensor sounder devices meet CEA 4021: 2003-07, where applicable, and meet EN54-17:2005 Input/Output devices plus EN54-18:2005 Short circuit isolation for use on the
transmission path of fire detection and alarm systems.
Sounder tone - Meets the following tone settings: High tone ( Continuous 933Hz) & Alternate tone (High 933Hz for 0.25s / low 700Hz for 0.25s)
When an S-Quad sensor is configured to operate a non LPCB approved STATE then this will contravene the LPCB approval.
# - these standards are met when the sensor is operating LPCB approved STATES.
All the LPCB approved STATES applicable to S-Quad fire sensors are shown. The required STATE is configured during commissioning. On initial power-up of the
system all the sensors operate in STATE 0.
Note sensor STATES are not applicable for wireless sensors.
S-Cubed Mark 2 (Legacy product range)

The Sounders in the following S-Cubed Mark 2 range of products listed below are LPCB approved to EN 54 : Part 3
S3IP-VP-W, S3-VP-W, S3IP-VP-ST-WR, S3-VP-ST-WR, S3IP-VP-R, S3-VP-R, S3IP-VP-ST-RR, S3-VP-ST-RR, S2IP-VP-W, S2IP-VP-R, S3IP-SN-W-V2, S3-SN-W-V2, S3IP-SN-ST-WR-V2,
S3-SN-ST-WR-V2, S3IP-SN-R-V2, S3-SN-R-V2, S3IP-SN-ST-RR-V2, S3-SN-ST-RR-V2, S3IP-SN-ST-RW-V2, S2IP-SN-R-V2 and S2IP-SN-W-V2.

Fire Panels
Vigilon Compact VA panel (EN) (Legacy panel)
Vigilon 4/6 loop panels (EN/BS)
A BS panel is very similar to an EN panel:
Indications Inner door
Indicators Inner door Message display
Message display Outer door
Outer door
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Zones
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
Power Fault Verify
Panel healthy 15:45
1 System Fault
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Sounder
Zones
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32 Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm System
Delay CB253
GENT 2010
Designed to EN54 Pts 2, 4 & 16
Fault Fire Test CB254
15:45
Power Fault Verify Disablement Power
Previous Next
System Fault Vigilon Fire System Sounder

GENT 2015 Fire Routing O/P
Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 Active
Test Fault/Dis
Disablement Power
Previous Next
Fire Routing O/P

Active
Fault/Dis
Voice Alarm Zones

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
All Zones Clear Zones
Speak Now VA Activated

MIC Auxiliary messages Emergency messages
1 TEST START ALERT 1
2 TEST END EVACUATE 2
STAND DOWN BOMB 3

3
EN54 Part 2, 4 & 16
by Honeywell
Vigilon
COMPACT VOICE 0XXXx
Key lock for

Access level 1
outer door
Controls to scroll events Pocket for Access level 2 & 3
Emergency
Operating instructions Controls
Access level 1 Key lock for Microphone
and Log Book
Controls to scroll events outer door
Pocket for Printer
Operating instructions Access level 2 & 3
and Log Book Controls
Vigilon Compact Panel (EN)
Outer door Indications
Message Fire Routing O/P

Active
Fire Routing O/P
Active
Display Fault/Dis
Fault/Dis
Access level 1
Controls
to scroll fire
Fire Panels
events
Inner door
Operating instructions Access level 2

Key lock for and Log Book Controls
outer door

Controls and indications
Panel
buzzer
Vigilon Compact panel or

EN Vigilon 4-loop panel or
Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm panel (legacy) has CB253 / CB254 LEDs in place of Fire routing LEDs
BS Vigilon 4-loop panel
BS Vigilon 4-loop panel:

NOT USED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Zones
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Fault Fire 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Power Fault Verify
Fault Fire
System Fault Sounder
Fire Routing O/P Not fitted on Power Fault Verify
Delay Active BS Vigilon 4-loop
Sounder
Test Fault/Dis
panel System Fault
Fire Routing O/P
Delay Active
Disablement Power BS Vigilon 4-loop panel:
Previous Next Commission Test Fault/Dis
Menu On/Off Cancel Buzzer Previous Next

Warning Disablement Power
F1 F2 F3 F4 Menu On/Off Cancel Buzzer
F1 F2 F3 F4
Sound Alarms Silence Alarms Reset Verify

Verify Sound Alarms
Enter
Silence Alarms
ABC DEF ! " # $ % ^ & * ( ) +
U1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 -
Insert U1
1 2 3
GHI JKL MNO : U2
Reset Q W E R T Y U I O P ;
Delete
U2 4 5 6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
A S D F G H J K L ., Enter U3
Fire
THRU BKSP Shift Z X C V B N M Space U4
INS 00 DEL

Indications applicable for all Vigilon panels

Indicators Description
Display The Display provides messages of the system status / events by means of 8 lines by 40 characters per line display.
Zones 1 (red) Hidden-until-lit fire zones indicators. When "Zones" text and number(s) are illuminated it indicates that a FIRE has been detected in the
specific zone(s). (Zone indicators are not applicable for BS Vigilon panels and Network Nodes)
Power When illuminated it indicates that a supply to the panel is present.
(green)
Fire When illuminated it indicates that a FIRE has been detected in the protected premises.
(red)
Verify When illuminated it indicates that the Verify button has been pressed and the alarm sounders in the system are delayed from sounding.
(amber)
Fault When illuminated it indicates that a FAULT has been detected in the fire detection and alarm system or in the audio system.
(amber)
System Fault When illuminated it indicates that a fault has occurred with the system processor. It is important to investigate this fault because the
(amber) fire alarm system may not be able to detect fires.
Disablement Applicable for EN Vigilon panels only. When illuminated it indicates that a part of the system has been disabled.
(amber)
Warning Applicable for BS Vigilon panels only. When illuminated it indicates part of the system has been disabled, delayed or not functioning.
(amber)
Fire routing O/P Applicable for EN panels only from mid 2015 onwards. When illuminated it indicates the Fire Alarm Routing Equipment is active.
Active (red) Prior to mid 2015 this LED was CB253 (amber) and it operates with Command Build 253.
Fire routing O/P Applicable for EN panels only from mid 2015 onwards. When illuminated and steady it indicates the Fire Alarm Routing Equipment is
faulty. When illuminated and flashing it indicates the Fire Alarm Routing Equipment is disabled.
Fault/Dis (amber)

Prior to mid 2015 this LED was CB254 (amber) and it operates with Command Build 254.
Power Fault When illuminated it indicates the battery or mains supply to the panel has failed.
(amber)
Sounder Applicable for EN Vigilon panels only. When illuminated (always with either the FAULT light or the DISABLEMENT light) it indicates that
(amber) there is a sounder fault (flashing indication) or sounder disablement (steady indication).
Delay Applicable for EN Vigilon panels only
(amber)
When illuminated it indicates that one or more delay blocks are setup on the panel.
Test Applicable for EN Vigilon panels only
(amber)
When illuminated it indicates one or more zones are in Test mode.
Commission Applicable for BS Vigilon panels only
(amber)
When illuminated it indicates panel is in commissioning mode.

Controls applicable for all Vigilon panels

Controls Description
Menu On/Off Pressing Menu On/Off will enable/disable the on screen menu facility which gives access to the system menus.
The 'Fn' buttons are used to select functions and sub-functions of the system menus which appear on the display. Each option available at
F1 to F4 a menu level has an associated function button and on pressing a function button will select the option described on the display.
Cancel Buzzer The Cancel Buzzer button when pressed will stop the internal panel buzzer from sounding.
Note the local buzzer is automatically silenced when the emergency microphone is being used to announce live speech from a Vigilon
Next Compact VA panel.
Sound Alarms Pressing the Sound Alarms button will announce 'evacuate message' and sound the evacuate alarms. This button is only pressed in an
emergency or at other agreed times, for example when conducting a system test or practice evacuation.
Silence Alarms Pressing the Silence Alarms button will stop emergency message announcements and silence the system alarms.
Reset Pressing the Reset button will clear any fires and return the panel to the condition seen before the fire event. If a fire condition should
reoccur immediately after a 'reset' then the indicated device should be investigated.
Verify If the Verify facility has been set up, then pressing the 'Verify' button soon after a fire detection will increase the time delay before the alarm
sounders are activated. This gives the user time to investigate the cause of the alarm and option to cancel the alarm within the delay time
period.
The 'U' buttons can be configured during commissioning to output user-defined actions, such as to disable devices in areas where smoke
U1
may be generated and to activate a plant shutdown, for example during a fire condition.
U2 The function of the 'U' buttons should be written on the label that is fitted on the back of the outer door.
Note: The Vigilon 4/6 loop panels have four configurable 'U' buttons.
At a Vigilon panel to operate a 'Un' key: press the 'Shift' key first then the 'Un' key.
This is pressed to acknowledge an entry of data or label text.
Enter

Controls applicable for Vigilon Compact (& VA) panels only:

Controls Description
These four buttons are used to scroll the displayed text.
ABC DEF These buttons allow data to be entered manually at the control panel.
1 2 3 When entering a label each press of a key will scroll the character string, for example:
GHI JKL MNO key 2 will scroll A B C 2 a b c.
4 5 6 key 1 will scroll 1 ? , . ; & * /
PQRS TUV WXYZ
The bottom row of keys are explained here:
The button is used to enter a SPACE between characters
7 8 9 The INS key allows text to move one position to the right
THRU BKSP
The DEL key allows a character to be deleted
INS 00 DEL
The BKSP button will delete previous character.
When entering a range data the THRU key is used to represent a '-', for example 1 THRU 5 equals 1 - 5.

Controls applicable for Vigilon Compact VA panel only - (legacy product)
Pressing one or more of the 10 buttons selects the local Voice Alarm Zone(s) of the local
n system to which emergency or auxiliary messages, or emergency microphone is to be Voice Alarm Zones
announced. The two LEDs beneath flash alternately to show the Voice Alarm Zone has 1 2 3 4 5
been selected.
(green and red) On selecting the required emergency or auxiliary message only one of these LEDs changes
to steady or flashing indication determined by the type of audio to be outputted to the
selected Voice Alarm Zones. The left LED indicates auxiliary message selection while the 6 7 8 9 10
right LED indicates emergency message selection.
(Green) Pressing the 'All Zones' button allows quick selection of all Voice Alarm Zones
All Zones
simultaneously. The accompanying LED gives a steady indication when the button is All Zones Clear Zones
pressed. Note all the VA Zones that have been setup in your system will give a flashing
indication and those not setup will give no indications.
Speak Now VA Activated
Clear Zones Auxiliary messages Emergency messages

Pressing 'Clear Zones' button will clear selected Voice Alarm Zones, also when auxiliary
messages are being announced pressing 'Clear Zones' will silence the announcements.
1 TEST START ALERT 1
Speak Now When 'Speak Now' light is illuminated the system is ready to allow live speech
announcement to selected Voice Alarm Zones via the Emergency microphone. 2 TEST END EVACUATE 2
(green) The indicator is lit following the selection of Voice Alarm Zones and on pressing the Press to
Speak Now Talk (PTT) button on the Emergency microphone.
If the 'Press to Talk' button is released the 'Speak Now' indicator will flash and switch off STAND DOWN BOMB 3
3
(green) after 20seconds duration or immediately switch off on pressing the Clear Zone button.
When the 'VA Activated' LED is illuminated it indicates the voice announcements are being
VA Activated
(red) made or emergency microphone is in use for speech announcement to Voice Alarms Zones.
Auxiliary messages When illuminated the system is announcing auxiliary message n to the selected Voice Alarm
(green) Zones.
The indicator is lit following the selection of Voice Alarm Zone(s) and on pressing the
n required Auxiliary message button.
Emergency messages When illuminated the system is announcing emergency message n to the selected Voice
(Red) Alarm Zones.
The indicator is steady or flashing determined by the type of emergency message being
n announced to Voice Alarm Zones.

Second fix parts

Vigilon 4/6 loop Panels
¨ Check that you have the second fix parts, which are supplied with the panel:
These procedures assume the respective 1st fix assembly of the Vigilon 4 loop (VIG1-24) / 6 loop EN Vigilon 4 loop EN Vigilon 6 loop
(VIG1-72) panel is already installed. The 1st fix backbox assembly may be surface or flush Parts Control panel Control panel
mounted. (VIG1-24) (VIG1-72)
¨ The second fix parts must now be installed before powering up the control panel. Inner door assembly 1 1
Cardboard cover
over PSU Battery Pack (2 x 12V 21Ah) 1 2
Cables of external circuits
Mains cable Battery box 1
Outer door assembly 1 1
Earth to Main Control Card 1 1
inner door
Loop card 1 1
(Option of (option of
up to 4 maximum) up to 6 maximum)
Hinge
points for Spares pack (see installation
inner and manual for pack content) 1pack 1pack
outer doors
Transparent Remove the protective covers

cover over
backplane ¨ Remove the cardboard protection cover fitted over the PSU. The cover is held in by a
retaining clip.
¨ Remove the transparent protection cover fitted over the backplane held together by an
elastic band.

Printer 0V
Hinge
points for
inner and
outer doors
PSU
Card guides

Fitting the inner door

¨ Locate the hinge pins on the inner door assembly into the two hinge pin holes j on the backbox outer face.
¨ Fit the earth lead from the backbox to the inner door spade connector k.
¨ Fit together the two blue connectors of the printer 0V leads l, the leads are located at the inner door and backbox intersection.
Cables of external circuits
Inner door Masking tape Earth to

inner door
Earth spade
Danger for connection from
backbox
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
EXPOSES HIGH
HVVOLTAGES
Preformed ribbon
cables held together
under masking tape Transparent
to be fitted during cover over
commissioning backplane
Card guide
Transit position of
locating printer paper roll
Inner the hinge pin and holder pin held
door together with an elasticband
Connector for
printer 0V Printer 0V
Backbox
Paper roll
holder bracket
Hinge point
BACKBOX (Part view)

Printer paper roll
"
The printer paper roll is secured with an elastic band to the card guide on the inner door.
¨ Remove the paper roll from the card guide and install paper into the printer mechanism. Ensure the paper roll enters the printer mechanism as shown.
Door Paper
roll
Printer
mechanism
Fold paper end thus

before attempting to
feed it through printer
Paper
feed knob
&

On the outside of the inner door there is a paper feed knob, DO NOT turn the knob in an upward direction as this may damage the integral printer.
¨ Upon completion of all commissioning work a new paper roll should be fitted.

Setting the DKC card Control buttons

The links, pot and switch on the DKC are factory configured as shown below.
DKC ASSEMBLY LCD Contrast adjust
Anti-Clockwise -
"
The emergency control buttons must always be left in an enabled state, with the 'control
Danger
Lighter
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
H VOLTAGES
EXPOSES HIGH V
buttons' link fitted.
RV1
Clockwise -
Darker There is no indication given at the panel when the link is set for inactive controls.
RV1 Display Contrast
Inner door assembly
SW1 Display and
¨ The display contrast is set using the Pot RV1 on the DAC, which is factory adjusted
8 keyboard Card (DKC) for optimum contrast. You can also adjust the contrast using the menu option under
7 [Test/Eng], see Appendix A menu maps.
"
6
Inner door
5
4 The contrast adjustment function using the menu options may not be
3 P1 applicable for some older build of panels.
2
1
Domain Address and baud rate settings
OFF ON P6 Typically the Baud rate set using these switches should be the same as the setting made using the
[TestEng] menu. The baud rate set must be backed up to the NVM. Where a baud rate value that
can only be achieved by [Test/Eng] menu, this must be set using the menu and backed up to NVM.
Link is NOT USED
leave link fitted. Baud Rate Domain address
It is for special use
with keyswitch 1 2 Baud 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address
application
Off Off 1200 Off Off Off Off Off Off 64
Off On 2400 Off Off Off Off Off On 1
On Off 9600 Off Off Off Off On Off 2
With Zone
On On 19200 etc
Control buttons
Sound Alarms indicators
Factory setting
On On On On On Off 62
(EN)
is with link fitted Buttons On On On On On On 63
enabled
Verify Zones 1 2 3 4
17 18 19 20
Factory set domain address - 1 with 19200 baud (see SHADED cells)
Reset
Zone indicators
Buttons Silence Alarms Without Zone
disabled indicators
The Zone indicators are enabled for normal operation at an EN control panel and must NOT be
(BS) panel or disabled.
Network node
The zone indicators are not applicable on a Network node nor on a BS Control panel. On these
products the 'zone indicator' links are set in the 'disable' position.

Card installation
Backplane
& When installing cards into the backplane always use anti-static work
procedures. DO NOT use anti-static procedures on live equipment.
Secure the two ribbon
cables (at the fold) under the clamp
40 way ribbon located on the backplane
" An IO Card is not required for connection to DKC and neither is it required to
connect to the Commissioning tool. The DKC now connects directly to the MCC card. The
Commissioning tool connects directly to the USB port on the MCC.
The two ribbon cables held together under a masking tape on the DKC assembly must be routed
20 way ribbon
into the backbox to connect to the Main Controller Card.
Master Controller Card (MCC)

Card guides
Use the USB port on

" Ensure the two ribbon cables from DKC are secured under a clamp on the
backplane. Fit the Main Controller Card (MCC) into the backplane before the ribbon
to be fitted to socket the MCC to connect to cables are connected to the MCC.
P1 CARD 0 on backplane the Commissioning tool.
P1 CARD 0
Main Controller Card
(SUPPLIED) & Always ensure the panel is completely powered down before removal
or fitting of cards into the backplane. Power down the battery supply before the
P2 CARD15 Network or IO Card (Optional)
mains supply. The power up should be done in reverse order.
P3 CARD 1
Loop Processor Card (SUPPLIED)
or RS232
¨ Ensure all the cards are installed in their correct location into the backplane and are
firmly seated into their respective slots.
Loop Processor Card or RS232

P4 CARD 2
(Option)
P5 CARD 3
(Option)
P6 CARD 4
(Option)
Fibre Network or RS232 or
P7 CARD 5
Loop Card#
Network or RS232 or
P8 CARD 6
Loop Card#
# for VIG1-72 only

Backplane

Terminals on Terminal Card

Terminal card
Terminals for Network node
CARD 4 CARD 3 CARD 2 CARD 1
Backplane RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
CTS RX RTS TX CTS RX RTS TX CTS RX RTS TX CTS RX RTS TX
NETWORK CARD IN SLOT P8
0V1 +VE1 -VE1 0V2 N/C +VE2 -VE2 N/C Terminals for Control panel
LOOP 4 LOOP 3 LOOP 2 LOOP 1
LOOP CARD IN SLOT P8 (Loop 6)
L1 0V L2 0V L1 0V L2 0V L1 0V L2 0V L1 0V L2 0V L1 0V L2 0V
IO CARD IN SLOT P8
A 5V B 0V CTS Rx RTS TX
P2 P3
Master alarm Clean C Terminals for Control panel and
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2- NC C NO Network node
PB1
IO (RS232) CARD IN SLOT P7

N/C 0V CTS RX RTS TX
P5 P6
LOOP CARD IN SLOT P7 (Loop 5)
L1 0V L2 0V 0V1 +VE1 -VE1 0V2 N/C N/C +VE2 -VE2 (WITH NETWORK CARD IN SLOT P2 OF BACKPLANE)
RS485 RS232
A 5V B 0V Tx CTS Rx RTS (WITH IO CARD IN SLOT P2 OF BACKPLANE)
PB2
P4
PSU board (located behind the
cardboard cover) Auxiliary Relay 1 Auxiliary Relay 2

NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO
L N
P2
P7 P8
RS232 0V
0V 0V 0V 0V These RS232 0V terminals
are for use with the RS232
wiring associated with IOC
fitted in Card slots 1 to 4.
Quick release terminals
P12

Pre power-up checks ¨ The Mains power is switched on after battery is installed and connected.
Dedicated mains supply
¨ The mains cable is the only external cable that is required to be connected at this initial stage. from consumer unit
Other external circuit cables are left disconnected, but are connected and tested later, they max. 230V ac
include:
• all loop circuits 5A Unswitched
• clean contacts fused spur unit
• auxiliary circuits
• master alarm circuits, has the end-of-line resistors (22K Ohm) fitted to the terminals on the mains
terminal card to inhibit a master alarm circuit fault indication. cable
Panel Gland
• and RS232/RS485
"
35mm
50mm
must be sleeved
A networked system is commissioned after all the individual standalone systems are fully
commissioned.
¨ Ensure all cards are securely fitted into their appropriate slots on the backplane. Use cable ties
(supplied)
¨ Ensure all ribbon cables are securely fitted into their respective sockets. ferrite
core
(supplied)
45mm
270mm
Mains supply wiring
&
1. The fire alarm system products are NOT designed to be powered from L N
IT Power systems. P2

2. All mains powered equipment must be earthed. PSU PCB
Ensure the mains supply cable enters the equipment via a dedicated cable entry point, which is located
adjacent to the mains terminal block and is also segregated from other loop wiring. The mains cable must be stripped
¨ Mains supply to any fire alarm control and indicating equipment must be via an unswitched 5A back to the length shown to allow
live and neutral wires to be wound
5mm
fused spur unit. A disconnect device must be provided to disconnect both poles and must have a through the ferrite core.
minimum gap of 3mm. The 'disconnect device' should be available as part of the building
&
installation and must be easily accessible after installation is complete.
Hazardous voltage remains after operation of a protection
¨ The fused spur isolator unit cover should be marked: fuse. Take appropriate action to guard against the risk of equipment
FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCH OFF
having exposed live mains supply.

Battery installation VIG1-72 panel battery installation
" The panel makes use of sealed lead acid type batteries which can have a
useful life of 5 years or more from the date of manufacture. It is strongly recommended
It is recommended that the mains supply is switched
Off during battery installation.
4 - 12V 21Ah batteries
Battery Box
Upper TH-
TH+ BT1+ BT2+
BT1- BT2-
shelf
that batteries are replaced after 4 years of use. All batteries must be disposed of as per Red Black P6
recommendation made by battery manufacturer. P4 P3
P1 P2
&
TH1
Ensure the batteries are held in place while they
are being wired. Ensure the battery terminals
Always use the recommended replacement battery. As there is a risk of do not come into contact with the metal enclosure.
Lower
an explosion if incorrect batteries are used. Place the two batteries on the lower shelf and lay them shelf
horizontally with terminals facing outwards.
Fit the bolt, spade connector, washer and spring

A
VIG1-24 panel battery installation washer to each battery terminal as shown above.
White.
Red Black B
It is recommended that the mains supply to the panel
Red Black
is switched Off during battery installation.
Fit the white link lead and then fit the red/black
Fit the bolt, spade connector, washer, spring washer to fused lead to the battery terminals, as shown above.
each battery terminal, as shown. 8 - 12V 21Ah batteries
Raise the two batteries to an upright position
Battery Box
Insert the battery on the right into the back box. and push them back into the enclosure.
Black Upper TH-
TH+ BT1+ BT2+
BT1- BT2-
Red shelf
P6
BT+ BT-
Insert the battery on the left into the back box. White.
A P4 P3
Red Black P20 Fit the ‘White’ link lead to outer + and - spade connectors
on the two batteries, as shown.
White P1 P2
Fit the battery lead assembly (red & black) to the TH1
remaining + and - spade connectors on the two
B
batteries, observe polarity.

Plug the plug on the battery lead to connector P20 located Route the battery red/black lead through hole in the shelf
of the battery box and fit the connector end of the lead Lower
on the bottom left of power supply PCB. shelf
to the PCB, located on the top right side.
The panel will only power up after the mains supply Place two more batteries 'B' onto the lower shelf and
A
is switched On. repeat procedures j to n.
Where required, add further four batteries onto the
upper shelf, use procedures j to o. The only
exception is that the red/black lead is directly connected
to the respective upper connectors on the PCB. B
The panel will only power up after the mains supply
is switched On. In-line fuse rated 10A QB ceramic 20mm x 5mm

PSU LED indications Write protect link on backplane

PSU The backplane assembly is fitted inside the left side of the backbox.
Ribbon cable
to Terminal Card The backplane has the card slots to facilitate interconnection of plug-in cards, such as the Main
connector P10 Controller Card (MCC), Loop Processor Cards, IO Cards and Network Cards.
P7
LD1
LD2 The backplane also has the flash memory
LD3 (NVM) which is under the control of MCC and
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5

LD4 Backplane
LD5 is a shared memory to which the system
P5
Spade connector configuration data is saved.
for 0V lead to printer
Flashing indication Ribbon cable to LK1 The link header on the backplane marked
Backplane
P11
connector P12 Protected LK1 provides 'write' protection and will stop
- write protected the SAVE and BACKUP commands from the
Steady indication panel controls modifying the memory.
Once the system is fully commissioned the

Unprotected
link LK1 should be configured to 'write
- not write protected protected', this is important on sites where
(factory setting) customers require compliance to the EN54
ERROR LD2 LD3 LD4 LD1 LD5 Part 2 standard.
RAM write/read
test failed
The NVM should always hold the complete
system back up.
ROM checksum error Indicates
communicating
with MCC

EEPROM checksum error Indicates Thermistor is O/C or
S/C or 43V boost test has failed.
EEPROM stuck in
busy mode
EEPROM reinitialised
EEPROM read does

not match RAM copy
The above LEDs flash 1s on and 1s off.
When a LED is ON it indicates an error.

For more than one error the LEDs will flash in sequence.

Fire Routing LEDs (Post Mid 2015) Command Build LEDs CB253 and CB254 (Pre Mid 2015)
The Fire Alarm Routing Equipment FARE red LED works The switching of the amber LEDs CB253 or CB254 occurs from a trigger of Command builds 253 or 254. The switching action must be
with FARE Interface configured to operate as a FARE configured during commissioning.
device. The FARE LEDs illuminate to indicate status of Pre mid 2015
FARE.
Post mid 2015
Fire
Verify
Sounder Not on BS
panels
Fire CB253
Verify
CB254
Sounder Not on BS
Power
Fire Routing O/P
panels
Active
Fault/Dis
Example
Power
This example shows how to configure the panel such that by activating an interface input (can be a push button switch), it will cause the
panel LED - CB254 and Master alarms to switch On. If the interface input is released then the panel LED - CB254 and Master alarms will
switch Off.
The following procedures assume a password entry is not required.

# - will appear if a PIN is setup.
Configure Command build trigger:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]# , momentarily press <etc> to select [SetUp] and [Build], type in the
command build number 254, select [Trigger] and [IO line], type in the interface input channel number, select [Device], type in the interface
device number, select [Loop], type in the loop number and then select [Enter]. The command build 254 is now configured to be triggered by
the interface input.
Configure Command build label:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press <etc> to select [SetUp] and [Build], type in the
command build number 254, select [Label] and type in a label of up to 40 characters in length, select [Display] to display the label on the
panel when the command build 254 is triggered.
Configure Command build action:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press <etc> to select [SetUp] and [Build], type in the
command build number 254, select [Action] and [Start MA], [Enter], [Reversbl] and [Enter].

How to configure the 'U' buttons Factory settings

The U1, U2, U3 and U4 buttons are active at access level 2, that is the buttons are accessible by An EN Vigilon 4/6 loop control panel has the following factory settings:
opening the panel outer door. System configuration
¨ All devices are assigned to Sector 1
0
) +
-
Insert U1 ¨ All devices are assigned to Zone 1
: U2
P ; Delete
Port settings
¨ P3 - USB (on MCC)
., Enter U3
Options:
Fire P0 - RS232 - (Terminal card - terminals P4) when an optional IOC is fitted in slot P2 of backplane
Space U4 P1 - RS485 - (Terminal card - terminals P4) when an optional IOC is fitted in slot P2 of backplane
Part of the Keyboard Addresses

¨ Domain address - 1 for EN panel and 0 for BS Panel
To operate a 'U' button first press the 'Shift' key and then the respective 'U' button. Each 'U' button ¨ Panel (Node) address - 1
is linked with a command build:
¨ U1 button will trigger command build number 251 NVM protect
¨ U2 button will trigger command build number 252 ¨ Software 'write' allowed (NVM protect - disabled)
¨ U3 button will trigger command build number 253 ¨ Hardware 'write' allowed (NVM protect -disabled)
¨ U4 button will trigger command build number 254
During commissioning the required command build action must be configured. How to fit the outer door
To fit the outer door you will first need to close the inner door and secure it to the backbox using the
Example two fasteners located on the right edge of the inner door.
This example shows how to configure the U1 button such that pressing it will start the master alarm

sounders and pressing 'U1' button again or pressing the Silence alarm button will stop the Fit the Outer door to the enclosure by hooking it onto the side hinge pins. The outer door may be
sounders. secured to the backbox using the key lock.

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]# , momentarily press <etc> to
select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 251, select [Action] -> [Start
MA] -> [Enter] -> [Reversbl] -> [Enter]. The U1 button is now configured to start the master alarm
sounders.

Vigilon Compact Panel

The following procedures assume the fire alarm control panel is installed, with cables terminated at the backbox and with the inner and outer doors fitted. Also the protective cover fitted over the Master
control board (MCB) inside in the backbox has been removed.
¨ Connect the flying earth lead j from the back box to the inner door spade connector.
¨ If not already done remove the protective cover k fitted over the Master control board inside in the backbox.
¨ Connect the ribbon cable l from the Display KEYBOARD (DKC) to the socket marked 'KEYBOARD' on the Master control board. Secure the ribbon cable to the side of the
enclosure using the cable clamp provided.
Cardboard cover protecting

the Master Control Board Plastic cover
Ribbon cable and Loop Card protecting PSU
and clamp
Inner door
Back box
MAINS
LOOP 1 SUPPLY
NET 1 END 1 Master
END 1 alarms 2
Warning
NET 1
LOOP 1 Master removal
END 2 alarms 1
END 2 of cover
exposes
live parts
Cover to protect the ESD Earth Battery

Earth lead from
Display and keyboard PCB Bonding point bracket
back box to inner door
WARNING
REMOVAL OF COVER
EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE

Cards and internal cables of the panel Set the Rotary switch SW2
This switch is set to the required position for the panel build on leaving the
factory. Before installing the Loop cards and Network card onto the Master
control board MCB ensure the switch j SW2 is set to a required setting if
Master Control Power Supply Unit
Board (MCB) (PSU) the panel is to be installed in an existing system, see table on the next page.
KEYBOARD INDICATORS AND DISPLAY
24V 0V B A TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2 L1 0V L2 0V NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO L1 0V L2 0V 0V MIPNC C NO MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2- N E L
P2
PB15 PB6 PB14 PB10 PB11 PB7 PB9 PB8

NVM hardware link P13
DANGER
FS3 3.15A(T)
Mains fuse
KEYBOARD
N L The NVM can be enabled or disabled by setting the hardware link k on the
24V MA1 - FS1 250mA
WARNING FS3 200mA MA2 - FS2 250mA
REMOVAL OF COVER P1 CARD 2 P2 CARD 1
EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE MCB. If the NVM protect is hardware disabled then it is also possible to
software enable or disable the NVM using the [Protect] option under the
[Setup] menu at the panel.
FIRMWARE BACKUP
Warning
DANGER
Removal of
cover exposes
live parts
Unprotect: Normally during commissioning the NVM is disabled
IC3 IC16
(unprotected) and writing to NVM is allowed.
0V L2- L2+
PP2
0V L1- L1+ POWER
SUPPLY
Protect: Once the configuration is backed up to the NVM the hardware link
P12
PB1A PB1B SW2
MODE
P1
P3
must be in the enabled position to disallow writing to the NVM.
P2 P16
P13
SW1 P7
BATT3
RESET BAT1
Installing the Cards

The MCB can accommodate two Loop Cards. One Loop card l can be
FS6 43V FS4 24V - 1A TE5
Network Card Remove
insulation disk 1A TE5 FS1 Bat 1- 3.15A TE5
fitted into the slot labelled CARD1 and the other Loop card n into the slot
labelled CARD2.
Loop Card 2 Loop Card 1

P13
NVM Protect - [Disabled]

SW2
MODE
" A networkable system has a Network Card m fitted into
the slot CARD 2 on the MCB and additionally the Network Card can
accommodate the second Loop card.

SW1
P13
NVM Protect - [Enabled] RESET
Earth Link
The earth link lead o is supplied with the Network Card. This link lead
must be fitted to the spade connector on the top edge of MCB with the other
Battery
end to the spade connector on the Network Card.
The lithium battery s is disconnected on leaving the factory by means of an insulation disk over
the top connector. The insulation disk must be removed before powering up the system.
BATT3
Terminals
The terminal blocks p on the top edge of the MCB are used for wiring
Remove Sleeve external circuits. The terminal block q on the top edge of the PSU is used
for wiring the mains supply to the panel. The connector r located on the
bottom edge of the PSU board is used to connect the battery supply.

Installing a replacement MCB in an older Vigilon Compact panel Remove the cards
These instructions cover how to fit a replacement Master Control Board (VCS-MCB-N) into a COMPACT-24-N ¨ Remove the Loop card(s) and Network card# from the MCB and then
(networkable) or COMPACT-24 (non networkable) Vigilon Compact panel. remove the MCB from the panel. (# - where applicable)
Replacement Master Control Board (MCB) OLD Master Control Board (MCB) Select the firmware part number and set the rotary switch
- networkable - non networkable ¨ Make a note of the firmware number on the chip in socket IC3 of the
24V 0V B A TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2 L1 0V L2 0V NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO L1 0V L2 0V 0V MIPNC C NO MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2- MCB being replaced. Determine the applicable switch setting
PB15 PB6 PB14 PB10 PB11 PB7 PB9 PB8 P15 P10 P11 P6 P14 P7 P9 P8 required from the table below and set the rotary switch on the
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
24V MA1 - FS1 250mA 24V MA2 - FS2 250mA
replacement MCB.
FS3 200mA MA2 - FS2 250mA FS3 200mA MA1 - FS1 250mA
P1 CARD 2 P2 CARD 1 P1 CARD 2 P2 CARD 1
The firmware in socket
IC3 of MCB being Applicable setting of switch
replaced SW2 on replacement MCB
FIRMWARE BACKUP
2211-148 0
IC3 IC16
BATT1
2211-146 1
CODE BCKUP
2211-136 2
PRINTER
POWER POWER
SUPPLY SUPPLY
SW2
MODE
P12
IC3 IC16
P12
2211-127 3
P16 P16
Re-fit the cards
P13
SW1
SW1 P13
¨ Fit the replacement MCB into the panel and reconnect the ribbon
BATT3
RESET
Insulation Disk
cables, and then fit the previously removed Network and Loop cards.
¨ An earth lead must be fitted between the spade tabs u on MCB and
&
Network card.
Configuration
- When a network card is fitted onto the MCB, ensure a spade tab (supplied) is fitted under ¨ Using a chip extractor extract the back up 'Configuration' chip fitted
the PCB fixing screw at position u. in socket IC16 (NVM) of the MCB being replaced and fit this chip
- Also ensure the bottom PCB fixing screw v is tightened to give good electrical connection. into the replacement MCB.
&
How to replace the MCB
There are in existence four variants of Vigilon Compact panels in the field. Here are the steps to replace an MCB Where the Configuration chip is known to be corrupt or
fitted in a Vigilon Compact panel.
is incompatible then DO NOT fit the chip into the replacement
Save Configuration to Commissioning tool MCB. Instead transmit the saved configuration from the
¨ If the panel is functioning correctly then before powering down ensure the system configuration is commissioning tool to the replacement MCB. The transmission
retrieved using the commissioning tool. must take place after panel power up. After transmitting the
Power down configuration to the panel 'back up' the data to NVM on Card 14.
¨ Completely power down the panel by isolating the mains and battery supply and then remove the Power up
ribbon cable connectors from the MCB. ¨ Power up the mains and battery supplies to the panel.

Terminals on the Master Control Board (MCB) Descriptions of MCB terminals

Terminals Description
NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO 24V, 0V, B and A These terminals accept the connection of a repeat indicator
panel (Port 0). Also the power terminals may be used on a
Network node to supply BACnet Gateway.
PB10 PB11
AUXILIARY RELAY 1 AUXILIARY RELAY 2 NC, C and NO These are auxiliary relay contacts. The auxiliary relay 1 is
Aux 1- 2-sets normally de-energised and operates with any fire event. The
L1 0V L2 0V L1 0V L2 0V Aux 2 - 1set auxiliary relay 2 is normally energised and operates
(de-energises) with any fault event.
0V, TX, A, RX These are terminals for RS232 or RS485 (Port 1 or 2
PB14 and B respectively).
LOOP 2 PB7
LOOP 1
L1, 0V, L2, 0V These terminals accept the connection of system devices on
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2 0V MIPNC C NO (Loop 1 and a loop circuit that starts at L1 and ends at L2. Devices that
Loop 2) are connected to the loop circuit include addressable fire
sensor/sounders, manual call points, interface units and
PB6 PB9 repeat/mimic panels.
RS-232 MONITORED INPUT
and CLEAN CONTACTS MA1+, MA1-, These terminals can accept two master alarm circuits that
24V 0V B A MA2+ and MA2- can operate 24V conventional alarm devices.
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
0V and MIP These are monitored input terminals that can accept the
connection of a switch. An active input will trigger Command
PB15
REPEAT PB8 build 250.
24V 0V B A TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2 L1 0V L2 0V NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO L1 0V L2 0V 0V MIPNC C NO MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
INDICATOR MASTER ALARMS NC, C and NO These are voltage free relay contacts (output) that operate
RS-485
(clean contact) with a fire event.
KEYBOARD
24V MA1 - FS1 250mA

FS3 200mA MA2 - FS2 250mA
P1 CARD 2 P2 CARD 1

FIRMWARE BACKUP
IC3 IC16
POWER
SUPPLY
SW2 P12
MODE
P16
P13
SW1
BATT3
RESET
Master Control Board

Settings on the DKC Control buttons

The links and pot on the DKC are factory configured as shown below.
LCD Contrast adjust
&
The emergency control buttons MUST always be left in an enabled state, with the
Anti-Clockwise -
Lighter 'control buttons' link fitted.
RV1
Clockwise -
Darker There is no indication given at the panel when the links are set for inactive
RV1 controls.
Display and
keyboard Card (DKC) Display Contrast
¨ The display contrast is set using the Pot RV1 on the DKC, which is factory adjusted
for optimum contrast. You can also adjust the contrast using the menu option under
Inner door
[Test/Eng].
P1
" The contrast adjustment function using the menu options may not be
applicable for some older build of panels.
P6
This link is used Address and baud rate

for keyswich application
only. Leave link fitted.
" The node and domain addresses can be changed from the factory settings to
a required address using the panel [Test/Eng] menus.
Zone indicators
The Zone indicators are enabled for normal operation at the control panel and must NOT be
Control buttons With Zone disabled.
Sound Alarms indicators
Factory setting (EN)
is with link fitted Buttons The Zone indicators are not applicable for a Network node or BS panel so the zone indicator links
enabled
Verify Zones 1 2 3 4
are set in the disabled position.
17 18 19 20
Reset
Buttons Silence Alarms Without Zone

disabled indicators
Network node

Pre Power up checks Battery Installation

¨ The mains cable is the only cable required to be ¨ Remove the battery support bracket from the backbox.
connected, with other external cables left ¨ Fit the battery lead to the PSU.
disconnected at this stage of commissioning:
¨ Fit the batteries in their correct orientation inside the backbox, see illustration.
• loop circuits
¨ Refit the battery bracket to secure the batteries in place.
• clean contacts
• auxiliary circuits PANEL
PSU BOARD
• master alarms (the 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor
fitted to inhibit a fault indication).
Bat1 - FS1 - 3.15A

• Monitored input (the 10K Ohm end-of-line P3
24V FS4 - 1A
resistor is fitted to inhibit fault indication).
& Ensure the mains cable to the panel is

securely connected to the mains terminal block
43V
FS6
1A P7
BAT1
Y1 Y2 G1
on the Power supply unit (PSU).

- +
¨ Ensure all cards are securely fitted into their Black Red
appropriate slots on the MCB. - +
+ -
¨ Ensure all ribbon cables are securely fitted into their Black
respective sockets.
2 - 12V 12Ah battery
"

The panel makes use of sealed lead acid type batteries which can have a useful life of 5 years or more from the
date of manufacture. It is strongly recommended that batteries are replaced after 4 years of use. All batteries must be disposed
of as per recommendation made by the battery manufacturer and in accordance with local regulations.
& Always use the recommended replacement battery, as there is a risk of an explosion if incorrect
batteries are used.
¨ Connect the battery leads as shown but leave the final circuit connection until after the Mains supply is switched On.

Mains supply PSU Indicators

PSU BOARD
Bat1 - FS1 - 3.15A

Dedicated mains supply
from consumer unit P3
24V FS4 - 1A
230V ac
43V Y1 Y2 G1
5A Unswitched fused FS6
spur unit 1A P7
BAT1
PANEL
- +
N E L
P2
FS3 3.15A(T)
Mains fuse
DANGER
Y1 Y2 G1
& Ensure the mains supply cable enters the panel enclosure through a
dedicated cable entry point.
Description Y1
(yellow LED)
Y2 G1
(yellow LED) (green LED)
Normal condition fast flash
(no faults in the system)
" These fire alarm system products are NOT designed to be powered from an IT
Power system.
Mains out of limit
24VDC failure only fast flash
slow flash
fast flash
Battery 1 failure only slow flash fast flash
All mains powered equipment must be earthed. Mains supply to any fire alarm control and Battery 1 and 24VDC failure slow flash fast flash
indicating equipment must be via a dedicated unswitched 5A fused spur unit, which should be 43VDC failure only fast flash fast flash
clearly labelled FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCH OFF.
No power to PSU
A 'disconnect device' must be provided to disconnect both poles and must have a minimum gap of Earth fault only On On On
3mm. The device should be available as part of the building installation and must be easily
accessible after installation is complete.
"
& Hazardous voltage remains after operation of a protection fuse. Take
appropriate action to guard against the risk of equipment having exposed live
On initial power-up all three PSU LEDs will switch ON for approximately
1 second.
mains supply.

PSU EEPROM link How to configure the monitored input

Ensure a shorting link is fitted to the programming header P1 located on the PSU. The link must be
fitted such that it shorts pins 1 and 2. This enables the EEPROM hardware write protect. Normally open contacts
"
These contacts can be a push button
switch, fire/fault relay contacts from
another panel or contacts from a timer.
The link is supplied fitted on the PSU board manufactured after September 2007.
2 - 10K Ohms -
resistors must be
PSU BOARD fitted as shown.
(part view)
Ensure a link
is fitted accross
pins 1-2
P1
Bat1 - FS1 - 3.15A
0V MIP
An active input will trigger
P3 P8
24V FS4 - 1A
the command build No 250
Monitored Input The command build action

43V MASTER CONTROL is configured during commissioning.
Y1 Y2 G1
FS6 BOARD
1A P7 PANEL
BAT1
The monitored input at the fire panel is activated by an external switch installed a maximum of
100m cable distance away from the fire panel. The input is monitored for both short and open
- + circuit faults. When the input is active it triggers the command build number 250 of the fire panel.
Example

The following example shows how to configure the monitored input at the panel to provide an
output sound signal 1 alarm in sector 2 of loop 1 as a reversible action. This means on operating or
"closing" the monitored input the panel will start alarms in sector 1 and on releasing or "opening"
the monitored input the panel will stop all the alarms from sounding.

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press <etc> to select
[SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 250, select [Action] -> [UserCode],
momentarily press <etc> to select [Sector], type in 2 for sector 2 and select [Loop] and type in 1
for Loop 1 -> [Action] -> [Signal 1] -> [Enter] -> [reversb] -> [Enter].

Fire Routing LEDs (post mid 2015) How to configure the LEDs CB253 and CB254 (pre mid 2015)
Post mid 2015 Pre mid 2015
The switching of the amber LEDs CB253 and CB254 is controlled by
action of command builds 253 and 254 respectively. The switching action
Sounder Sounder must be configured during commissioning.
Fire Routing O/P
Active CB253
Example
Fault/Dis
CB254 This example shows how to configure the panel such that by activating an
Power
interface input (can be a push button switch on the input), it will cause the
Power
panel LED - CB253 and Master alarms to switch On. If the interface input
switch is released then the panel LED - CB253 and Master alarms will
switch Off.
The Fire Alarm Routing Equipment FARE red LED work with FARE Interface The following procedures assume a password entry is not required.
configured to operate as a FARE device. The FARE LEDs illuminate to indicate the # - will appear if a PIN is setup.
status of FARE.
Configure the Command build trigger:
Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press <etc> to select [SetUp] ->
[Build] and type in the command build number 253, select [Trigger] -> [IO line] and type in the interface input
channel number, select [Device] and type in the interface device number, select [Loop] and type in the loop
number -> [Enter]. The command build 253 is now configured to be triggered by the interface input.
Configure the Command build label:

[Build] and type in the command build number 253, select [Label] and enter a label of up to 40 characters in
length, select either [Display] to display the label on the panel when the command build 253 is triggered.
Configure the Command build action:

[Build] and type in the command build number 253, select [Action] -> [Start MA] -> [Enter] -> [Reversbl] and
[Enter].

How to configure the U1 and U2 buttons External printer

An external printer (part number PRINTER-HAND) may be connected to the control panel during
commissioning. It is essential that the printer is connected to the RS232 - Port 1.
9-way D-type
U1 connector
Download lead - 77821-01NM
GND
Rx
Tx
U2
Hand held printer
GND
Rx
Tx
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2
Terminal PB6 - PORT 1 of Master Control Board
"
(Card 0)
PB6 RS-232
PORT 1 is configured for RS232 Communication.
The U1 and U2 buttons are accessible by opening the panel outer door.
The PORT 1 mode must be set to Printer mode MASTER CONTROL
and the baud rate may be adjusted BOARD
if required during commissioning. PANEL
On operating the U1 or U2 at the panel it will cause triggering of command build number 251 (for Ensure panel and printer baud rate are set to
the same value.
button U1) or command build number 252 (for button U2). During commissioning the required
command build action must be configured. The panel's baud rate for Port 1 is factory set to 1200, and the factory set Mode is Standard and
must be changed to Printer when a printer is connected to Port 1.
Example
This example shows how to configure the U1 button such that pressing it will start the master alarm
sounders releasing the U1 button will stop the sounders. Additionally the sounders can be stopped
by pressing the Silence alarm button on the panel. How to configure Port 1 mode to the printer

To configure Port 1 to the Printer mode: Press Menu On/Off button and then select [Test/Eng]->
The following procedures assume a password entry is not required. [Usercode]#, select <etc> and then select [Config]. Momentarily press <etc> to select [Comms].
# - will appear if a PIN is setup. Then select [Card] and enter 0 on choosing the master control card. Then enter 1 to select Port 1.
Select [Mode] and using the [Previous] and [Next] buttons scroll to Printer and select by the
[Enter] option.
Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] -> [Usercode]# , momentarily press <etc> to
select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in the command build number 251, select [Action] -> [Start
MA] -> [Enter] -> [Reversbl] -> [Enter]. The U1 button is now configured to start the master alarm To switch ON the printer
sounders. If the printer is not working and is switched Off then you can switch it On. To switch On the printer:
Press Menu On/Off button and then select [Control] -> [UserCode]# and select [Printer] and
then select [On] and [Enter].

Factory settings
An EN Vigilon Compact Control panel has the following factory settings:
System configuration
¨ All devices are assigned to Zone 1
Port settings
¨ P0 - RS485, Baud: 1200, Mode: Repeat
¨ P1 - RS232, Baud: 38400, Mode: Standard
¨ P2 - RS232, Baud: 38400, Mode: Standard
¨ P3 - USB
Addresses
¨ Domain address - 1 for EN panel
¨ Panel (Node) address - 1
NVM protect
¨ Software 'write' allowed (NVM protect - disabled)
Hardware 'write' allowed (NVM protect -disabled)

Connect the 40-way ribbon to the socket labelled Mains terminal block
Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Panel - KEYBOARD on MCB and secure cable to the side
of the enclosure.
with fuse
(legacy product) Fit the earth lead to the inner door P Clip for
The following procedures assume the Control panel is installed with cables terminated at the mains cable
backbox. ACC DKC
¨ Open the Outer door of the enclosure using the door key supplied and then open the
Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Panel - (legacy product)

inner door.
WARNING
¨ Remove the protective cover fitted over the printed circuit boards located inside the
REMOVAL OF COVER
EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE
backbox. MCB
¨ Earth Lead ACC

Ensure the earth lead located at the top right of the backbox is connected to the spade
connector on the inner door. PSU
¨ DAC ribbon cable

Connect the 40-way ribbon cable from the DKC to the socket marked KEYBOARD
on the left edge of the Master Control Board (MCB). Secure the ribbon cable to the
side of the enclosure using the cable clamp provided.
¨ ACC DAC ribbon cable

Route the 14-way ribbon cable from the backbox on to the inner door and connect it
to the left unoccupied socket on the ACC DKC. Secure the ribbon cable to the inner Connect microphone cable
Connect the 14-way
door using the cable clamp provided. ribbon to socket Secure 14-way ribbon to Inner door to socket P11 labelled
ACC DKC. using cable clamps supplied. ‘microphone’ on the ACC
and secure cable to the P clip.
¨ Emergency microphone cable
Connect the Emergency microphone cable to the socket P11 labelled 'microphone' on
the bottom edge of the ACC board. Secure the microphone lead to the 'P' clip on the
backbox.

Cards and internal cables of the panel NVM hardware link P13
The NVM can be enabled or disabled by setting the hardware link
Master Control P13 k on the MCB. If the NVM protect is hardware disabled
Audio Control Card (ACC)
KEYBOARD INDICATORS AND DISPLAY
24V 0V B A TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2 L1 0V L2 0V NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO L1 0V L2 0V
Board (MCB)
0V MIPNC C NO
then it is possible to software enable or disable the NVM using
Power Supply Unit
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
BGM AUDIO AUDIO
PA MIC 1 PA MIC2 LOOP 1 LOOP 2
the [Protect] option under the [Setup] menu at the panel.

L R
24V B A PTT 0V 0V PA2 PTT2 0V O/A O/B I/A I/B O/A O/B I/A I/B
PB15 PB6 PB14 PB10 PB11 PB7 PB9 PB8 (PSU)
KEYBOARD
P15 P14 P10 P12 P13
N E L
24V MA1 - FS1 250mA P2
WARNING FS3 200mA MA2 - FS2 250mA FS3 3.15A(T) DANGER
REMOVAL OF COVER P1 CARD 2 P2 CARD 1 Mains fuse
EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE FS2

N L Unprotect: Normally during commissioning the NVM is disabled
TE5 1A0
FS1 (unprotected) and writing to NVM is allowed.
TE5 1A0
AUDIO LOOP 1
FIRMWARE BACKUP
BGM MPG MIC PA
AUDIO LOOP 2
IC3 IC16
Protect: Once the configuration is backed up to the NVM, the
LD1
hardware link must be placed in the enabled position to disallow
P6
Warning
Removal of
P1 -SMT cover exposes
0V L2- L2+ 0V L1- L1+ POWER P2 -SMT live parts
P3 DANGER
P9
SUPPLY
writing to the NVM.
P9
PP2
PB1A PB1B SW2 P12
MODE
P2 P16
P13
P4
AUDIO 1
SW1
BATT3
P2 P1
RESET P3
Network Card MICROPHONE P4 P7

Installing the Cards
The MCB can accommodate two Loop Cards. One Loop card l
P11 AUDIO 2
BAT1
Remove FS6 43V FS4 24V - 1A TE5

insulation disk 1A TE5 FS1 Bat 1- 3.15A TE5
can be fitted into the slot labelled CARD1 and the other Loop
SW2 card n into the slot labelled CARD2.
Loop Card 2 Loop Card 1 P13 MODE
"
NVM Protect - [Disabled]
SW1
A networkable system has a Network Card m
P13
NVM Protect - [Enabled]
Audio Control Card
RESET
fitted into the slot CARD 2 on MCB and additionally the
Controls and indicators Network Card can accommodate the second Loop card.
Battery
The lithium battery s is disconnected on leaving the factory by means of an insulation disk over the top Earth Link lead
BATT3
connector. The insulation disk must be removed before powering up the system. An earth link lead o is supplied with the Network Card. This link
must be fitted to the spade connector on the top edge of MCB
with the other end to the spade connector on the Network Card.
Remove Sleeve
Setting the Rotary switch SW2 Terminals

This switch is set to the required position for the panel build on leaving the factory. Before installing the Loop and Network cards into The terminal blocks p on the top edge of the MCB are used for
the MCB ensure the rotary switch j SW2 is set to an appropriate setting if it is used as a replacement in an existing panel.
wiring external fire system circuits. The terminal block q on the
Firmware in socket IC3 of MCB Applicable setting of switch SW2 on MCB top edge of the PSU is used for wiring the mains supply to the
2211-148 0 panel. The connector r located on the bottom edge of the PSU
2211-146 1 board is used to accept battery cable. The terminals on the top
2211-136 2 edge of the ACC are used to connect to the audio circuits.
2211-127 3

PA PA MIC 1 AUDIO LOOP 1 AUDIO LOOP 2

Terminals on the Audio Control Card 24V B A PA1 PTT1 0V O/A O/B I/A I/B O/A O/B I/A I/B
Descriptions of ACC terminals
Terminals Description P14 P12 P13

FOR FUTURE USE
L R These terminals accept the connection of background L R
PA MIC 2
music, for example pre amplified output of an amplifier. PA2 PTT2 0V

24V, B, A, PA1, These terminals accept the connection of a microphone for
PTT and 0V PA application.
P15 BGM P10
PA2, PTT2 and 0V These terminals are for future use to accept the connection
of a second microphone.
BGM AUDIO AUDIO
O/A, O/B, I/A and These terminals accept the audio loop circuit connections. L R
24V
PA MIC 1
B A PTT 0V 0V
PA MIC2 LOOP 1
PA2 PTT2 0V O/A O/B I/A I/B
LOOP 2
O/A O/B I/A I/B
How to link out an
I/B (for Audio loop 1 Here the 'O' in O/A and O/B signify output, while the 'I' in P15 P14 P10 P12 P13
audio loop if it is
not being used
and 2) I/A and I/B signify input. There are two audio loops and
these are Audio loops 1 & 2. If the second audio loop is
not being used then it must be linked out, as illustrated. O/A O/B I/A I/B
FS2
TE5 1A0
AUDIO LOOP
FS1
TE5 1A0
AUDIO LOOP 1
BGM MPG MIC PA
AUDIO LOOP 2
LD1
Message card
with Audio Pack
P6
P1 -SMT
P3 P2 -SMT
P9
P9
P4
AUDIO 1
P2
MICROPHONE P4
P11 AUDIO 2

Terminals on the Master Control Board Descriptions of MCB terminals

Terminals Description
24V, 0V, B and A These terminals accept the connection of a repeat indicator panel
(Port 0). The power terminals may be used on a Network node to
NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO
supply BACnet Gateway card.
NC, C and NO These are auxiliary relay contacts. The auxiliary relay 1 is factory set
Aux 1 - 2-sets as a normally de-energised relay that operates with any fire event.
PB10 PB11
AUXILIARY RELAY 1 AUXILIARY RELAY 2 Aux 2 - 1-set The auxiliary relay 2 is factory set as a normally energised relay that
L1 0V L2 0V operates (de-energises) with any fault event.
L1 0V L2 0V
0V, TX, A, RX & B These are terminals for RS232 or RS485 (Ports 1 or 2 respectively).
PB14
L1, 0V, L2, 0V These terminals accept the connection of system devices on a loop
LOOP 2 PB7 (Loop 1 and Loop 2) circuit that starts at L1 and ends at L2. Devices that can be connected
LOOP 1
on the loop circuit include addressable fire sensor/sounders, manual
TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2 0V MIPNC C NO
call points, interface units repeat/mimic panels and micro and mains
distributed amplifier units
PB6 PB9 MA1+, MA1-, MA2+ These terminals can accept two master alarm circuits that can operate
RS-232 MONITORED INPUT and MA2- 24V conventional alarm devices.
and CLEAN CONTACTS
24V 0V B A
MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
0V and MIP These are monitored input terminals that can accept the connection of
a switch. An active input will trigger Command build 250.
PB15 NC, C and NO These are voltage free relay contact outputs that operate with a fire
REPEAT 24V 0V B A TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2 L1 0V L2 0V NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO L1 0V L2 0V 0V MIPNC C NO MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
PB8 (clean contact) event.
INDICATOR MASTER ALARMS
RS-485 Pre power up checks
KEYBOARD
24V MA1 - FS1 250mA

FS3 200mA MA2 - FS2 250mA
P1 CARD 2 P2 CARD 1 Ensure the following external circuit cables are left disconnected at this stage of commissioning:
• loop circuits
• audio circuits
Loop Card
FIRMWARE BACKUP
• clean contacts
IC3 IC16
• auxiliary circuits
POWER
• master alarms (the 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor is fitted to inhibit a fault indication).
SUPPLY
P12
• monitored input (the 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor is fitted to inhibit fault indication).
&
P16
P13
SW1
BATT1
RESET
Master Control Board Ensure the mains cable to the panel is securely connected to the mains terminal
block on the Power supply unit (PSU).
¨ Ensure all cards are securely fitted into their appropriate slots on the MCB.
¨ Ensure all ribbon cables are securely fitted into their respective sockets.

"
Battery Installation
¨ A battery lead supplied in the spares pack must be fitted to the Power supply board, The panel makes use of sealed lead acid type batteries which can have a
connector P7 labelled BAT1. The next step is to install the batteries inside the useful life of 5 years or more from the date of manufacture. It is strongly recommended
enclosure, which requires removal of battery brackets from the backbox and then that batteries are replaced after 4 years of use. All batteries must be disposed of as per
installation of the batteries in correct orientation, standing on the small side with recommendation made by the battery manufacturer and in accordance with local regulations.
terminals at the top facing outwards. Secure the batteries by refitting the battery
brackets.

¨ Switch On the mains supply to the panel and then make the connections to the battery. & Always use the recommended replacement battery, as there is a risk of
an explosion if incorrect batteries are used.
Battery lead connects
to PSU board P2 Bat1 PSU
Panel with doors open PANEL
Bat1 - FS1 - 3.15A

PSU BOARD
P3
24V FS4 - 1A
43V Y1 Y2 G1
FS6
1A P7
BAT1
- +
Black Red
- + - +
2 - 12V 12Ah battery
Battery brackets
Battery brackets secured with two nuts
secured with two screws

Mains supply
Dedicated mains supply & Hazardous voltage remains after operation of a protection fuse. Take
appropriate action to guard against the risk of equipment having exposed live
from consumer unit
mains supply.
230V ac
Audio LEDs
5A Unswitched fused The Audio LEDs on the ACC card are associated with Audio Loop 1 and
spur unit AUDIO LOOP 1 Audio Loop 2, to indicate when the audio is active. When the background
music, centrally stored message held on the message store card (these
BGM MPG MIC PA include attention tones), emergency microphone and/or PA microphone
PANEL is active, then the respective LED is lit.
AUDIO LOOP 2
Under normal condition the MIC LED is lit, this is a 'park' position.
N E L When the emergency microphone is used and on pressing the PTT button the attention tone will
P2
sound, so the MPG LED is lit briefly before the MIC LED is lit again for live announcements.
DANGER
FS3 3.15A(T)
Mains fuse PSU Indicators
As for VIGILON Compact, see page 40.
PSU link
&
Ensure the mains supply cable enters the panel through a dedicated
cable entry point. External printer
" These fire alarm system products are NOT designed to be powered from an IT
Power system.
How to configure the monitored input
All mains powered equipment must be earthed. Mains supply to any fire alarm control and How to configure the buttons U1 and U2
indicating equipment must be via a dedicated unswitched 5A fused spur unit, which should be As for VIGILON Compact, see page 43.
clearly labelled FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCH OFF.
A disconnect device must be provided to disconnect both poles and must have a minimum gap of
How to configure LEDs CB253 and CB254 (Legacy)
3mm. The 'disconnect device' should be available as part of the building installation and must be As for VIGILON Compact, see page 43.
easily accessible after installation is complete.

How to check and set the audio signal Factory settings

Jack sockets An EN VIGILON Compact VA Control panel has the following factory settings:
There are two stereo 3.5mm jack sockets on the Audio Control Card labelled Audio 1 and Audio 2.
A standard low impedance headphone may be plugged into the each jack sockets to listen to the System configuration
audios. Any audio from the panel that is outputted can be listened to using the headphone.
PANEL

ACC BOARD AUDIO 1
¨ All devices are assigned to Zone 1
¨ Sector 1 is assigned to all ten Voice alarm zones

AUDIO 2
Port settings
VU Meter ¨ P0 - RS485, Baud: 1200 Mode: Repeat
The VU (Volume Unit) meter provides an indication of the signal level of audio being sent to the two
audio loops. For an optimum setting of audio the deflection on the VU meter must not exceed 0dB. ¨ P1 - RS232, Baud: 38400, Mode: Standard
The noise level remains constant for all input signals. If the input signal is low as read on the VU ¨ P2 - RS232, Baud: 38400, Mode: Standard
meter then noise level will be more noticeable.
large signal
¨ P3 - USB
small signal Addresses

¨ Domain address - 1 for a EN panel
Noise ¨ Panel (Node) address - 1

remains
constant
irrespective of
NVM protect
signal level ¨ Software 'write' allowed (NVM protect - disabled)
Hardware 'write' allowed (NVM protect -disabled)
Where an amplifier of a music system provides an adjustable pre-amplified output, the adjustment
must be such that the heavy beat of background music does not cause the pointer on the VU meter
to deflect above 0dB, ie in the red range.
The actual volume settings of background music, PA and VA to the speaker circuits are held at the
micro-DAUs and Mains powered DAUs in the system. The settings of these volume levels are
made to site specific requirement using the commissioning tool.

Indications on power up Initial tests
"
These are typical power up indications given at the VIGILON, VIGILON Compact and VIGILON
Compact VA panels with no loop circuits connected.
The menus at the control panel are accessible by pressing the Menu On/Off
"
At this stage of commissioning the audio loop circuit of VIGILON Compact VA panel
button. For details of the menu options see Appendix A - Menu Maps .

must remain disconnected.
¨ Switch On the mains power to the panel and then connect the battery supply: Display test
• the panel buzzer sounds ¨ To test the display press the Menu On/Off button and then select [Test/Eng] ->[Disp
• some LEDs on the panel will be momentarily lit and the display reads: Test]. The Display Test option will cause all the LEDs and buzzer (including
Powering up - please wait backlight) to remain On for a short duration.
........
• the dots below the powering up message indicates progress. Setting the Clock
• the Disablement light gives a flashing indication and after a short duration change ¨ To set up the time and date, press the Menu On/Off button and then select [SetUp]
to a steady indication and the display gives messages similar to: -> [Usercode]# ->[Set Clock]. The Set Clock option will allow the setting of the time
Time not set and date at the panel.
NVM Card Fitted
Audio Card Keypad fitted -(Compact VA only) Printer test (if fitted)
Loop 1; 0V resistance is 28.4R, L is 1 ¨ To test the printer, press the Menu On/Off button and then select [Control] ->
NVM is not write protected [Usercode]# -> [Printer], if the printer is On select [Test] to carry out a printer test.
Card found at Card 1 x.xx (aa/bb/cc)
Allocating Loop n
ACC Loop O/S 2 -(Compact VA only) Power supply test
Indications on power up
• NVM Card - Non Volatile Memory Card found ¨ Test the panel’s mains and battery supply by carrying out temporary disconnection
and reconnection, to allow event indications to be given on the panel. Ensure
• Card 1 - Loop card 1 found
sufficient time is given for the event to be displayed, normally within 2 minutes.
• Loop 1 has a measured 0V line loop resistance form end to end is 28.4R. The
relative inductance ratio is 1
Master alarms circuit tests
• the x.xx is the software version number of the card
¨ Check that indications are given when there is a fault on the master alarm circuit.
• Audio controller card (ACC) Loop has 2 outstations found this appears on Carry out an open circuit test by disconnecting the end of line resistor. Then carry out
VIGILON compact VA panel only. a short circuit test by shorting the master alarm circuit terminals.
• the aa/bb/cc signifies the day, month and year of software release.
Allocation: OK at Card X : Allocated zzz
There may be other indications and messages depending on the panel condition.
• Disablement indicator is lit.

Useful menu options Password or PIN code
"
The menu maps of all the menu options that are accessible at the control panel are detailed in
Appendix A.
The terms Password, PIN (Personal Identification Number), Usercode and
Access code mean the same and are used interchangeably.
Panel Buzzer
¨ It may be necessary during commissioning to disable the panel buzzer. It is possible A password restricts access to the controls available to the user at the Control panel.
to selectively switch the disablement, fault, fire and supervisory buzzer sound to Off
or On. It is important to ensure that the buzzers are switched On for normal operation There are three access levels to the controls. These are access level 1, 2 and 3.
after commissioning.
# - will appear if a PIN is setup. ¨ The Access level 1 controls only allow cycling through of multiple fire events
messages on the screen using the two buttons on the outer door.
Press Menu On/Off button and then select [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]# and select
<etc> [Config], [Buzzer] this will allow selection of [Disable], [Fault], [Fire] or ¨ Access level 2a is for the CUSTOMER. Here the person responsible for the system
[Supervis] and then select [On/Off] and [Enter]. can access the 'essential controls' by opening the panel outer door using a key
¨ Access level 2b is for the CUSTOMER. Here the person responsible for the system
"
There is no indication given at the panel of buzzer disablement.
can access essential controls and some configuration menus using the panel door key
plus a customer PIN.
¨ Access level 3 is for the ENGINEER. Here the person responsible for the system can
Software version check access essential controls and all system menus using the panel door key plus Engineer
PIN.
The software version of the panel can be displayed by viewing the status of the master control
board / Main control card.
¨ Daily PIN
There is another password that changes daily, which is available to the servicing
Useful menu options

To check the software version of the Master control board / Main control card: Press Menu On/Off organisation. This daily password provides the same access to controls as the
button and then select [Info], momentarily press <etc> to select [Status] -> [Card] and enter Card Engineers' PIN. The daily PIN is only used when the Engineer's PIN is not known.
number 0, which is the Main control board / Master control card and then select [Enter]. The
display will show software version number and date of release.
" Always make a note of the Customer and Engineering PINs once they are
created. Ensure the Customer PIN is passed on to the person responsible for the fire
alarm system on the site.

How to create an Engineer PIN How to change the Customer PIN
"
The Vigilon and Vigilon Compact panels leave the factory with no Engineer PIN code
" All the VIGILON range of fire panels with MCC/MCB at V4.53 or greater are
automatically set up with a FACTORY DEFAULT CUSTOMER PIN: 2 2 2 2, once an
(Access level 3 code). Therefore on first power up there is an open access to all the Engineer PIN is made active.
Access level 3 menus. The Customer PIN provides access to access level 2 restricted menu options that cannot alter the
The menu options under the Engineer PIN provides access to access level 3 controls that can alter configuration of the system. To change a Customer PIN:
the configuration of the system.
You will need to be at Access level 2.
To create or change an existing Engineer PIN: ¨ Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]# -> enter the
(You will need to be at Access level 3 if an Engineer PIN is already set up.) existing Customer PIN and select [Enter], select [New Pass] and then type a PIN of
¨ Press the Menu On/ Off button and select [Test/Eng] ->[UserCode]# -> then less than 15 characters in length and press the Enter key.
momentarily press <etc> to select [Config] -> [New Pass] and then type a new PIN
or change an existing PIN and press the Enter key. ¨ It is recommended that the PIN is at least 4 numbers and no greater than 15 numbers
for VIGILON compact and VIGILON Compact VA panels. The VIGILON panels
¨ It is recommended that the PIN is at least 4 numbers and no greater than 15 numbers can use numbers and as well as letters in the password code.
for VIGILON compact and VIGILON Compact VA panels. The VIGILON panels
can use numbers and as well as letters in the password code.
How to erase a PIN
The Engineer or Customer PIN can be erased. To erase the PIN of either Customer or Engineer
level you will need to be at the respective access level.
¨ Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] -> enter the
existing Customer PIN/Engineer PIN and select [Enter], select [New Pass] and then
Password or PIN code
just press the Enter key, this will erase the PIN. If the Engineer PIN is erased then
Customer PIN is also erased giving open access to all the menus.

Address allocation 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12
Spur on main loop

Main
Resonance Search1 loop 30 31 5 6 7 8 13
Where S-Quad sounder devices manufactured post April 2014 are circuit Spur
on
installed in a system then these devices automatically check that the main
components used to produce the sound output are working at their loop 29 Spur 22 23 24 25 14
resonant frequency, this is the optimum point where the sound output END 2 on
END 1 main
is at its loudest for the lowest power consumption. 28
loop 21 15
During a resonance search the sounders will slowly change the tone Previous Next
frequency to confirm the resonant point. This change in tone frequency

will be heard as a slight tone shift that lasts for about 1 minute. 32 27 26 20 19 18 17 16
Note: The End 2 connection is

After each allocation of loop circuit from a VIGILON or VIGILON CONTROL not made at this stage of commissioning
Compact panel and subsequent first operation of the Sound Alarm PANEL
function then there is one time only post allocation Resonance Search Address allocation with Loop circuit end 1 connected
performed.
& Ensure the panel is first powered-down before connecting the external
& Always power-up the panel with the mains supply first and then
connect the battery. The power-down sequence should be in the reverse order.
loop cables to the panel.
It is recommended that each external circuit is wired up to the terminals at the panel, one circuit at
a time and tests conducted to ensure that each circuit is functioning correctly. We start by
connecting End 1 of the loop only.
How addresses are allocated to devices on the loop ¨ Ensure end-2 of the loop cable remains disconnected.
Each device connected to a loop circuit is allocated a software address on a sequential lowest ¨ Switch ON the mains and battery supply to power-up the panel, you will initially see
Address allocation
unused value basis. The allocation of addresses starts from one End of a loop circuit in a numerical the powering up messages. If there are no device 'address allocation' faults the panel
order. If both ends of the loop circuit are connected then the allocation of addresses start from will start the loop.
End1. On reaching a T-breaker the devices on the spur circuit are allocated addresses. On Allocating Loop n
completion of allocation of addresses to the spur circuit the process continues along the main loop. Allocation: OK at Card X : Allocated Y
1 Resonance search has the advantage that ensures sounders operate at maximum efficiency, especially in extremes of temperature and to take
account of potential ageing of the sounder parts with time. It is important for resonance search to be conducted during annual maintenance.
Note also sounder & VAD devices are monitored for failure. Also EN54 Part 3 speech sounder has an attention tone volume that is lower than the
volume output from a standard sounder. All speech sounder devices will not perform the resonance search unless this mode is exited and set to
maximum volume.

Starting Loop n How to re-allocate addresses to a loop circuit

Loop started OK at Card X: Started Y
¨ Even if all the devices are wired correctly and there are no allocation faults, It is possible to selectively commence the address reallocation to devices on a loop circuit:.
there may still be some device faults. The panel fault buzzer will sound and ¨ Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] ->type your password if one
the Fault LED will be lit. is set up and then select [Loop] ->[Allocate], now enter the CARD number of the loop circuit
and select [Enter].
¨ To stop the local buzzer from sounding press the Cancel Buzzer button.
" After successful allocation of addresses to all the devices on a loop, the new loop map is
"
checked against the last map on the NVM, if found to be different then a warning indication is given.
In practice there may be system wiring and hardware faults during
the address allocation stage, these faults are also displayed as messages, for Address allocation with Loop circuit End 2 connected
further information on what they mean and possible action that can be taken,
&
see Appendix B - Message action.
Allocation faults Before changes are made to the wiring inside the panel first power-down the respective
During allocation of addresses to the devices connected to a loop circuit there may be loop circuit.
faults detected and these are displayed at the panel accompanied with LED indications. ¨ Disconnect End 1 of loop 1 and connect the End-2 of the loop and power up to commence
Allocation : HW Fault Card x number y Loop z reallocating of addresses to devices on the loop, this time from End 2. Ensure addresses are
Allocation : Tx Fault Card x number y Loop z allocated to all the devices on the loop.
Allocation : Double Allocated Card x number y Loop z
Allocation : Map Error at Card x number y Loop z ¨ On completion of this test, power down the loop and connect both ends of the loop and ensure
¨ An allocation fault that has been rectified will not be recognised until after addresses are allocated to all the devices on the loop from End 1.
re-allocation of the loop.
¨ Repeat these tests on the other loops if fitted.
¨ A loop with allocation faults will not be able to distinguish between a point
type sensor and a call point. Plexus Devices
¨ When a short circuit fault is found on allocation of addresses, the loop After soft allocation of addresses to loop devices the Plexus devices will need to be allocated addresses using
Address allocation
re-allocates addresses to the device before the short circuit. The device the Plexus tool.
loop breaker remains open and the device LED is lit.
During start up The Plexus tool will need to be connected to the VIGILON panel for LRT binding data to be created. The
binding data is then applied to each Plexus device so that it is associated with the LRT and the Plexus devices
¨ A loop is started after allocation. Each device is set up to start operating is given a SAFE device address.
normally based on its type, when the analogue channels are read.
Typical starter fault For full information on how to pre commission and pre allocate a Plexus system see publication titled
ASCII Device is Faulty, number X Loop Y 'Preallocation & Pre-Commissioning - User Guide (4188-1011_Part 2).
The above fault will only be displayed if repeat / mimic panel is powered up.

To SAFE address a device

SAFE Addressing
A SAFE address is an address given to a device during commissioning, the value of which # - will appear if a PIN is setup.
is stored in the non volatile memory within the electronics module of the device, the SAFE
address is therefore carried with the device. Press Menu On/Off button and then [Set Up] -> [Usercode]# and then momentarily press <etc> to select
[Set Up] and then again momentarily press <etc> to select [Device], now type in the soft address of the
A SAFE address can be given to any device on a loop circuit: device and then select [Loop], now type in the loop number on which the device resides and then select
¨ Individually [Safe] and finally type in a safe address and select [Enter].
¨ in a consecutive range or
¨ to all the devices on a loop circuit.
" It is possible to SAFE address devices using the commissioning tool. If SAFE
addressing a range of devices, it is quicker to do this using the controls at the panel.
To convert from SAFE to soft address

If for any reason the SAFE address given to a device is not required and the device needs to be converted
for soft addressing, then:
Press Menu On/Off button and select [Set Up] -> [Usercode]# and then momentarily press <etc> to select
[Set Up] and then again momentarily press <etc> to select [Device], now type in the SAFE address of the
device and then select [Loop], now type in the loop number on which the device resides and then select
[Safe] and finally types in 0 for the safe address and select [Enter]. This will convert the device back to soft
addressing mode.
SAFE Addressing
To find devices on a loop circuit

Checking a loop map Checking physical location of devices on a loop map is made easier by having two people in
A loop map is checked against the as fitted wiring drawings. This will confirm the exact location of communication with each other. While one person walks around the site and mark off the devices
each system device and its address. on the as fitted wiring drawings, the other person operates the panel controls.
The 'find' device is a function that gives visual or audible indication at the respective device on a
It is possible to display or print a loop map. loop circuit. The following procedure assumes no password access is required.
¨ Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Info] -> [Display]/[Print], note print will ¨ Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [Usercode] ->[Loop] ->[Find
only appear if a printer is connected to the panel. Momentarily press <etc> to select Dev], now enter CARD number n of loop circuit n, select [Start] and type in a device
[Loop Map] (note the menu is different if a network card is fitted in the panel as number (usually device 1 if starting from the beginning) and then select [Enter]. The
there will be a [Net Map] option), type in a loop number and select [Enter]. The loop display shows the device and loop number:
map is either displayed or printed, a typical example is shown below. Number 1 on Loop 1
¨ Press [Next] to find the next device on the loop and at any stage if the previous device
needs to be found then select [Previous].
A found device will provide visual or audible indication.

Map information for Loop 2 15:45
S-Quad Sensors and MCP
Os Prev Next Common Position
1 End1 2 Main Loop ¨ A fire sensor or system manual call point will operate its LED for 0.5 second On and
2 1 3 Main Loop 0.5 second Off repeated.
3 2 4 Main Loop
4 3 9 L2 5 Spur Loop Sounders and S-Cubed
5 4 6 Spur Loop ¨ Each system alarm sounder on S cubed or S-Quad device will provide an audible and
6 5 7 Spur Loop / or visual indication for 0.5 second On and 0.5 second Off repeated.
7 6 8 Spur Loop
Mains powered DAU and micro DAU
Address of next device
¨ A Mains powered DAU will switch On an LED located on the main board, which
Checking a loop map
changes from blink to 1s on 1s off when it is found.

Address of previous device
Where the device is Interface units
located, either on the Ensure the outputs are not connected to external equipment at this stage of
main or spur loop commissioning.
Address of the device
¨ Each interface output will in turn be activated for 0.5 second On and 0.5 second Off,
this process will repeat.
Panels on loop circuits

¨ A mimic and repeat panel on a loop circuit will display its device number.

NVM Hardware Write protect

Non Volatile Memory (NVM) Hardware 'write protect' on a VIGILON 4/6 loop panel
New Vigilon TERMINALS Older Vigilon
The NVM is located inside the panel on the Backplane of VIGILON panel and on the FOR CARD IN P8
4-loops panel
4/6-loops panel 12345678
Master Control board of VIGILON Compact (VA) panels. The NVM should hold
P10
the latest system configuration data. TERMINALS
FOR CARD IN LOOP 5
P13 123456
&
P11
LK1
Protected
Do not attempt to write protect using the link P13 while a back up - Write protected
to the flash chip or initialisation of the memory is in progress.
Backplane
IC1 IC2
The link header P13 on the Backplane provides hardware 'write' protection and will stop Unprotected
[Save] and [Back-up] commands from the panel controls modifying the memory. The link is - NOT write protected P13
(factory setting)
factory fitted to allow card data to be saved to the NVM.
LCC
"
P13
P13
Write protected NOT Write protected
Where the system is required to be EN54 Part 2 compliant, then the link Backplane
(factory setting)
P13 must be left in protect enabled position, that is to disallow write to NVM, on
completion of system commissioning. Hardware 'write protect' - VIGILON Compact & (VA) panels
. New Master Control Board (MCB) - networkable OLD Master Control Board (MCB) - non networkable
24V 0V B A TX1 RX1 0V TX2 RX2 L1 0V L2 0V NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO L1 0V L2 0V 0V MIPNC C NO MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-
PB15 PB6 PB14 PB10 PB11 PB7 PB9 PB8 P15 P10 P11 P6 P14 P7 P9 P8
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
24V MA1 - FS1 250mA 24V MA2 - FS2 250mA
FS3 200mA MA2 - FS2 250mA FS3 200mA MA1 - FS1 250mA
P1 CARD 2 P2 CARD 1
Non Volatile Memory (NVM)

P1 CARD 2 P2 CARD 1
FIRMWARE BACKUP
IC3 IC16
BATT1
CODE BCKUP
PRINTER
POWER POWER
SUPPLY SUPPLY
SW2 P12 P12
MODE IC3 IC16
P13 P16 P16
SW1
SW1 P13
BATT3
RESET
Insulation Disk
Non Volatile 'Hardware' NVM protect link P13 is factory set to NVM protect disabled
Memory -
NVM
NVM protect - [Disabled] NVM protect - [Enabled] There is also 'software'NVM
(ie NVM unprotected, (ie NVM protected,
protect enable and disable
that is write allowed) that is write not allowed)
feature, see menu maps.

NVM Software - 'write protect' and 'unprotect' To back up loop data to NVM
To 'software' write protect NVM A fully allocated loop should be backed up to the Non Volatile Memory (NVM). The following
Once the NVM is protected, it is not possible to 'write' or 'backup' card data to NVM. To write procedure assumes no password access is required and write protect is disabled.
protect to NVM:
¨ Press the Menu On/Off button and then [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press
¨ Press the Menu On/Off button and then [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press <etc> to select [Backup] and select the loop number n to be backed up to the NVM.
<etc> to select [Protect] and then select [Enable] ->[Enter]. Select [NVM card] ->[Enter].
A confirmation will be given on the display: A confirmation will be given on the display:
NVM is write protected at card 14 Loop card n Backed up
Checksum written to card 14
To 'software' write unprotect NVM
"
Once the NVM is unprotected, it is possible to 'write' or 'backup' card data to the NVM. To write to
NVM:
It is also important to back up data held in Card 0 (MCC), to do this carry out
¨ Press the Menu On/Off button and then [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press above procedures except after the [Backup] command enter 0, which signify card 0.
<etc> to select [Protect] and then select [Disable] ->[Enter].
# - will appear if a PIN is setup, if so enter a PIN.
A confirmation will be given on the display and the warning light may be illuminated:
NVM is not write protected at card 14

To recover loop data from NVM How to electrically erase the NVM
¨ On power-up the information stored on the Non Volatile Memory is automatically
recovered to the Local Controller (MCB) and Loop processor cards.
If there is a recovery failure you will get the following message: & Under normal circumstances erasing the NVM is not necessary as
there is only one back up of the complete system configuration data held at the
Recovery failed at card x
panel. The NVM Initialisation should only be performed by a trained and qualified
# - will appear if a PIN is setup. engineer, as executing this command will erase all the data backed up at the
panel.
¨ It is possible to recover data previously backed up to Non Volatile Memory.
"
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [SetUp] -> [Usercode]#, momentarily press
<etc> to select [Recover] and select the card number n to be recovered from the Non
Volatile Memory. Select [NVM card] ->[Enter]. To completely erase the NVM you will first need to switch On the freeblock and
A confirmation will be given on the display: disable the hardware and software write protect. This will allow access to the
initialisation command.
Loop card 1 Recovered
" A warning will be given if the loop map is different to that previously backed
up to the memory (NVM). For information on how to 'hardware' write protect NVM, see
To switch On freeblock
page 59.
The following procedures assume no password access is required.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]# momentarily press <etc> and
select [Test] and then select [Freeblock], press [Next] for controller and select [Enter], which will
display numbers on the top left of the display to show the freeblock is On.

To initialise the Non Volatile Memory
The following procedures assume no password access is required.
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]# and then select [Card] ->
[Init NVM] and then [Enter]. The following confirmation message will be displayed:
NVM Card Being Initialised NVM card 14 : 512K bytes
To switch Off freeblock

Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]#, momentarily press <etc> and
select [Test] and then select [Freeblock], press [Previous] for Off and select [Enter]. On
completion do a display test to clear the freeblock number display.

2km Loop circuit - tests using LDT 1km Loop circuit - manual tests
Loop diagnostic tool Applicable for panel fitted with VIG-LPC and COMPACT-LPC loop cards
Applicable for panel fitted with VIG-LPC-EN or COMPACT-LPC-EN cards The loop circuit tests involve checking the loop circuit resistance, capacitance and then carrying out
open circuit, short circuit and break tests.
Where 2km loop cards are fitted in a VIGILON or VIGILON Compact panel having compatible loop
devices then the Loop Diagnostics Tool should be used to test the loop circuits.
Loop resistance and capacitance
For information on the Loop Diagnostic Tool see the Loop diagnostic tool help guide. ¨ Power down and disconnect both ends of the loop 0V wiring at the control panel,
During certain tests using the Loop Diagnostic tool where directed by the tool it may be necessary whose resistance and capacitance are to be measured.
to repair a loop circuit after a test.
Resistance
How to [Repair] a loop circuit ¨ Using a multimeter measure the resistance between the loop 0V (End 1) and loop 0V
(End 2). In practice this should not be greater than 13 ohms for 1Km cable ONLY.
When a loop circuit is tested for open or short circuit fault or if a genuine wiring short or Dependent on the number of devices on a loop circuit over 1Km cable length ONLY,
open circuit fault should occur, then rectification action must be taken. To rectify the an allowance can be made for contact resistance of up to 10mW per device.
fault, remove the fault and process the repair command at the control panel. Over 1Km cable length ONLY: Worse case measured loop resistance:
having 50 devices no greater than 13.5 ohms
Press the Menu On/Off button and select [Test /Eng], [Usercode] and if a password
having 100 devices no greater than 14 ohms
2km Loop circuit - tests using LDT
access is required, type in the PIN and press the Enter button. Select [Loop] and then
momentarily select <etc> and select [Repair] and type in the loop circuit you want to having 200 devices no greater than 15 ohms
repair, for example loop 1or 2 and then select [Enter]. ¨ Check the loop cable screen to loop 0V resistance this should be an open circuit.
Capacitance measure
Loop resistence measured by the panel ¨ Typically where alternative allowed loop cable types are being used then a measured
The loop cards VIG-LPC-EN or COMPACT-LPC-EN measures and displays the loop resistance on capacitance between the loop 0V and cable screen should practically be no be greater
the panel screen during power up of the loop circuits, see page 52. The measured resistance can than 0.21uF. However the Loop Driver is capable of driving a higher capacitance.
be viewed at any time after allocation using the [info] menu under the Loop Card status at the
panel.
However the loop resistances and many other loop parameters can be measured and viewed using
a Loop Diagnostic Tool.

Ground break test

Loop circuit tests A ground break test should be carried out at this stage:
Loop short circuit test ¨ Disconnect the 0V line from End-1 of a loop circuit.
A loop short circuit isolation test should be carried out at this stage. It is recommended that the LOOP CABLE
sounders are switched On before conducting this test. REMOVE THE 0V

LINE TO
INTRODUCE A
LOOP CABLE GROUND BREAK
PANEL
enclosure
PANEL
enclosure
BOARD
TERMINALS
L1 0V
"
BOARD
TERMINALS
A single 0V line break should not cause the loss of any part of the system.
L1 0V
SHORTING LINK
End 1 cable break test
End 1 Short test ¨ The cable break may have to be sustained for up to a minute. The display should read:
¨ Create a short circuit by wiring a link across the loop terminals at End-1. There Wiring changed - ground break at card x number y on loop z
should be no loss of any part of the system. The display should read: ¨ To clear the fault, the 0V line should be reconnected and then the loop should be
Wiring changed - short at card x number y loop z repaired using the [Repair] function at the panel.
Wiring changed - loop split End 2 loop break test
¨ The ground break test should be repeated at the other end of the loop circuit, End-2
¨ After rectification (removal of the short circuit) you will need to [Repair] the loop
Loop circuit tests

and again at Mid point of the loop.
circuit.
End 2 and Mid circuit Short test " The exact location of a ground break is not indicated at the panel, however the
loop will run as normal.
¨ A short circuit test should then be repeated at End-2 and again at mid point of the
loop. ¨ To clear the fault, the 0V line should be reconnected and then the loop should be
repaired using the [Repair] function at the panel, see page 62.
¨ After each test carry out rectification (remove the short circuit) you will then need to
[Repair] the loop circuit, see page 62 .

Positive line break test Earth fault test

A positive line break test should be carried out at this Earth fault tests should be carried at this stage:
stage: Type of earth fault
0V (-ve) LOOP CABLE L1 (+ve)
Interrogate the [PSU] readings using the [Test/Eng] menu
¨ Disconnect the +ve loop connection at one End LINE
EARTH
LINE
EARTH to establish the type of Earth fault.
of a loop circuit. FAULT FAULT
TEST TEST
L1 (+ve)
LOOP CABLE
Type of Earth fault Earth (Ear) reading
LINE
GROUND No earth fault around 60
BREAK
TEST +ve line and earth greater than 75
PANEL
enclosure
10K -ve line and earth less than 40
resistor
PANEL ¨ At the end of the test operate the [Repair]

enclosure
function at the panel.
BOARD
TERMINALS
L1 0V L1 0V
BOARD
0V-line earth fault test
¨ Connect the 0V line to the earth of the control panel enclosure.
TERMINALS
L1 0V
This may have to be sustained for up to 1 minute for the fault to be
detected. The display should read:
The display should read:
Earth Fault
Wiring changed - split at card x
number y on loop z ¨ On removal of earth fault the display should read:
Earth Fault cleared
+ve line earth fault test
" A single +ve line break should not

cause the loss of any part of the system.
¨ Now connect the +ve line to earth via a 10K ohm resistor. This
may have to be sustained for up to 1 minute for the fault to be
detected. The display shows an Earth fault message as above and
after restoration a cleared message is displayed.
Loop circuit tests
¨ Reconnect positive (+ve) line to clear the fault.

¨ Repair the loop using the [Repair] function the
panel, see page 62.
" If the resistance between Earth and Loop +ve is in the
order of a few ohms then this will be registered as a ‘short circuit’.

O - Output, I - Input and . signify - not used

Checking device STATUS Device digital I / O channels
Loop Device Status S4 Dual OH/Red VAD O..O 1, 2, 4, 5
To list the STATUS of a device on an allocated loop at the Control Panel: Press Menu On/Off S4 Heat/Voice Sen Sndr/Red VAD OOOO 2, 5
button and then select [Info], momentarily press <etc> to select [Status] -> [Device], enter the S4 Dual OH/Voice Sen Sndr/Red VAD . OOO 1, 2, 4, 5
device number, select [Loop], enter the loop number n on which the device resides, select [Enter]
to view device status information. S4 Dual OH/CO/Voice Sen Sndr/Red VAD OOOO 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Status of End 1 S4 Dual OH/White VAD O. .O 1, 2, 4, 5
Monitored Input / LED is of the device
attached to the device Location of the (high or low) S4 Dual OH/White VAD (HP) O. .O 1, 2, 4, 5
device on the loop Status of End 2
Loop on which of the device S4 Dual OH/Voice Sndr/White VAD (Std) OOOO 1, 2, 4, 5
the device is installed Device description (high or low) S4 Dual OH/Voice Sen Sndr/White VAD (HP) OOOO 1, 2, 4, 5
Loop 1 No. 7 Dual optical/Heat/CO S4 Heat/Voice Sndr/White VAD (HP) OOOO 2, 5
LED) S4 Dual OH CO/Voice Sen Sndr / White VAD (HP) OOOO 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Loop breaker LB1:C End1:Hi End2:Hi
condition I/O:...0 Anal:1-4,6 S4 Dual OH/Voice Sounder . OOO 1, 2, 4, 5
C:closed 2nd:250 3rd:0 Short delay:0
Zone 1 Zone 1 S4 OH Sensor Sounder . OOO 1, 2, 5
S4 Dual OH Sensor Sounder . OOO 1, 2, 4, 5
S4 Heat Sensor Sounder . OOO 2, 5
Short circuit delay
Tertiary address
used primarily by
associated with S4 Dual OH CO Sensor . . .O 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
number of T breakers
sounders/VAD (strobe) S4 Heat Sensor . . .O 2
off T breakers
Zone number and label S4 Heat Sensor Sounder . OOO 2, 5
Checking device STATUS

Analogue channels
used
1:Optical (forward) S4 Dual Optical Heat Sensor . . .O 1, 2, 4
Secondary address
denotes group of devices 2:Heat S4 Dual Optical Heat Sensor CO . . . O 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
3:Gas
Digital
Input outputs
4:Optical (Backward) S4 Dual Optical Heat Sensor Sounder . OOO 1, 2, 4, 5
5:Sounder/VAD (Strobe)/Speech fault
6:Monitored line or LED + Monitored input 6
Analogue Channel 1 is forward scatter optical smoke sensor + Monitored output 6
Analogue Channel 2 is heat sensor
Other devices
Analogue Channel 3 is for CO gas sensor
Analogue Channel 4 is for backward scatter optical smoke sensor Beam transmitter . . .O 2
Analogue Channel 5 reports sounder/flasher/speech faults to the control panel Beam receiver . . .O 1- raw data
Analogue Channel 6 reports monitored input/monitored output faults to the control panel 2- average
data

Device digital I / O channels Device digital I / O channels

MCP . . .O 6 The legacy products below are for reference
Repeat panel . . .O - S-Quad Dual Optical Heat Sensor Strobe O..O 1, 2, 4, 5
Zonal mimic . . .O - S-Quad Dual Optical Heat Sensor Sounder . OOO 1, 2, 4, 5
Mimic panel . . .O - S-Quad Dual Optical Heat Sensor Speech Strobe OOOO 1, 2, 4, 5
T-breaker . . .O S-Quad Dual Optical Heat Sensor CO Speech OOOO 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Loop interface all possible 1-channel 1 Strobe
I - input 2-channel 2 Slave LED . . . O +L
O - output 3-channel 3 Sounder . OO .
4-channel 4 3 - Low freq.
5 2 - On/Off
Interface unit (mains powered) all possible 1-channel 1 Repeat sounder . OO .
I - input 2-channel 2
Optical . . .O 1
O - output 3-channel 3
4-channel 4 Optical heat . . .O 1,2
5-battery Heat . . .O 4
6-mains Slave Relay O . . O+R
S cubed OOOO 5 Single channel interface unit IO.O 1,2,5
1 - IR control
2 - Tone Loop powered zone module I . .O 1,5
3 - Power Optical/Heat Sounder . OOO 1,2
4 - VAD
(Strobe)
"
The correct device type may not be displayed if the loop circuit has allocation faults.
¨ Check that the device is of the correct type and is suitable for the area in which it is
installed.
¨ Check the digital status of all devices.
¨ On successful allocation check that the total number of devices found equals the
number installed. Also note there will be a loop voltage on the unconnected end of the
cable.

Plexus Device Status
Use the controls at the Vigilon Control panel select [Info] -> Radio Sounder Strobe
momentarily select <etc> in order to find and select [Status] -> 15:47
Loop 1 No. 47 Radio Sounder Strobe
[Device] and enter the device number or range whose status is I/O:.00O Anal:5,6
required, then select [Loop ] and enter the loop number on 2nd:0 3rd:0 LRT:41
which the Plexus devices reside and then select [Enter]. The Zone 4 Zone 4
S:010010485766 ID:3040
panel displays the status of device(s): P1:43 RSSI:47 P2:42 RSSI:43 Batt:35
Radio Call Point
Loop 2 No. 43 Radio Call Point 15:45
I/O:...O Anal:5, 6 Radio Optical detector
2nd:0 3rd:0 LRT:41 Loop 1 No. 51 Radio optical 15:48
Zone 2 Zone 2 I/O:...O Anal:1,5
S:000005098244 ID:3040 2nd:0 3rd:0 LRT:41
P1:42 RSSI:48 P2:41 RSSI:49 Batt:40 Zone 4 Zone 4
S:039100006577 ID:3040
P1:47 RSSI:41 P2:51 RSSI:44 Batt:59
This is the RSSI which is a This is the network ID Radio Heat detector
measure of the link quality with Loop 1 No. 45 Radio Heat 15:46
the linked Parent device Months of charge remaining I/O:...O Anal:2, 5
having address 42 dependent on use. 2nd:0 3rd:0 LRT:41
A device battery fault Zone 2 Zone 2

S:136110645425 ID:3040
indication is given closer to P1:44 RSSI:45 P2:47 RSSI:47 Batt:59
end of useful battery life.
This is the RSSI which is a Radio Dual Optical Heat detector

measure of the link quality with Loop 1 No. 51 Radio Dual optical/Heat
the linked Parent device having I/O:...O Anal:1,2,3,4
address 41 2nd:0 3rd:0 LRT:41
Zone 2 Zone 2
This is the serial number given of the Radio call point, S:0471000064440 ID:3040
P1:50 RSSI:44 P2:43 RSSI:42 Batt:59
which is the same number as the one printed on a label
inside the Call point on its PCB.

Product Analogue Channels Time average

Device checks Tnew
S4 Heat Sensor 2 - heat 66
" Ensure all dust covers have been removed from the sensor heads and the
system is allowed to operate for at least 24 hours to obtain accurate time average and
S4 Heat Sensor Sounder
S4 Dual Optical Heat Sensor
2 - heat
1 - optical (forward) 25
66
condition code readings. 2 - heat 66

4 - optical (backward) 40
S4 Dual OH/Red VAD 1 - Optical (forward) 25
Checking the time averages 2 - Heat 66
Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Info], momentarily press <etc> to select [Time Avg] and 4 - Optical (backward) 40
type in the required channel number from the range 1-6 whose time average is required, select S4 Heat/Voice Sen Sndr/Red VAD 2 - Heat 66
[Device] and type in the device number, select [Loop] and type in the loop number of the device
->[Enter]. The display shows time averages for the device. S4 Dual OH/Voice Sen Sndr/Red VAD 1 - Optical (forward) 25
2 - Heat 66
4 - Optical (backward) 40
S4 Dual OH/CO/Voice Sen Sndr/Red 1 - Optical (forward) 25
Time average readings of Channel 1 device 1 loop 1
VAD 2 - Heat 66
Tnew (On demand) Average Channel 1 Device 1 Loop 1 23:15 3 - CO 25
19 252 252 252 252 252 19 19 19 19 18 18 4 - Optical (backward) 40
Foreground (fast) Time
average readings T1 to T5 of S4 Dual OH/White VAD 1 - Optical (forward) 25
Channel 1 Device 1 loop 1 2 - Heat 66
Background (slow) Time e Aver channel 1 Device 1 Loop 1
average readings T6 of T11 [Repeat] [Previous] [Next] [Cancel] S4 Dual OH/White VAD (HP) 1 - Optical (forward) 25
Channel 1 Device 1 loop 1 2 - Heat 66
S4 Dual OH/Voice Sndr/White VAD (Std) 1 - Optical (forward) 25
2 - Heat 66
Foreground (fast) time average readings 4 - Optical (backward) 40
Tnew T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 S4 Dual OH/Voice Sen Sndr/White VAD 1 - Optical (forward) 25
On 80mS 320mS 1.28S 5.12S 20.48S (HP) 2 - Heat 66
Device checks
demand 4 - Optical (backward) 40

Normally reads 252, unless there is a threshold. S4 Heat/Voice Sndr/White VAD (HP) 2 - Heat 66
S4 Dual OH/CO/Voice Sen Sndr/White 1 - Optical (forward) 25
Background (slow) time average readings VAD HP 2 - Heat 66
Tnew T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 3 - CO 25
On 1.36min 5.46min 21.84min 1.45hr 5.82hr 23.3hr 4 - Optical (backward) 40
demand

S4 Dual OH/Voice Sounder 1 - Optical (forward) 25

2 - Heat 66
S4 OH Sensor Sounder 1 - Optical (forward) 25
2 - Heat 66
S4 Dual OH Sensor Sounder 1 - Optical (forward) 25
2 - Heat 66
S4 Heat Sensor Sounder 2 - Heat 66
S4 Dual OH CO Sensor 1 - Optical (forward) 25
2 - Heat 66
3 - CO 25
Beam Transmit 0
Beam Receive 2 150 - 170
Typical new Time average values for legacy 34K sensors

Device type 34K Analogue Channel number Time average Tnew
Optical 1 200 - 235
Heat 2 180 - 210
Heat 2 180 - 210
Device checks
Checking the Exception/Subfault codes Exceptions Meaning Action

/Condition codes
'Exception' (EN) or 'Subfault' (BS) are condition codes and these codes provide information about a
sensor device. A code indicates small changes in the environmental condition, sensor mechanism 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or This is the sub-fire band and No action need be taken.
and how the sensor performs in the system. To ensure that the sensor exception codes are 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or if set as shown it should be
meaningful, all existing codes must be cleared and the system left undisturbed for at least 24 hours. 1100000000 taken as showing that the
sensor is at its optimum
Code definition sensitivity for its location.
There are ten different conditions possible for each sensor type, although not all of them are defined.
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or A sub-fire has been Action should be to check
Each condition code has a range of 0-3.
0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or generated which would location and alter sensor
Code Meaning 2200000000 suggest that the sensor was state or type as required.
0 This condition is OK. This code is not displayed unless another non either too sensitive for its This should only be done
zero code exists. environment or that the with the knowledge of the
sensor type may be customer. Remember to
1 or 2 Suggests preventive maintenance is required, where necessary, to incorrect for the location. re-backup all changes to
avoid possible false alarms. states onto the NVM.
3 The sensor is faulty. A fault condition indication is given at the control 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or These codes indicate that The location should be
panel. A message reading ‘Sensor Out of Specification’ is displayed. 0020000000 the sensor is in a windy checked and a change in
A CODE 3 is automatically disabled by the system to prevent false alarms. location. This will cause the siting made, if required.
Time and date when Exceptions or Condition codes were read chamber voltage to drop. Note: Wind will not cause
Code Level 1 shows one the sensor to false alarm.
Time: 15:54.07 Fri 20 December 2002 23:15
drop only, Level 2 shows
Exception Location of the device
Number 2 on Loop 1 residing on this loop greater than one drop.
condition 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 whose exceptions are
shown.
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 or This shows that the sensor On commissioning the
0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 or time averages are close to sensor should be replaced.
These condition codes 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 or acceptable limits. A sensor with code 2 is
indicate the device is 0000020000 worse than code 1. On
probably disconnected
maintenance sensors with
0 - position 10th - position
code 2 should be replaced.
For definition of these codes see the table
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 or This shows that high The device should be
To view the exception/condition codes of a device
0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 or frequency noise events have replaced. On maintenance,
Press to select Menu On/Off button and select [Info] -> <etc> -> [Event] -> <etc> -> [Exception] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 or been detected by the sensor with code 2 should
-> [Enter]. To view all the currently active exceptions on the system use the next and previous menu 0000000200 system. A code 1 shows one be replaced. If it reoccurs
options to scroll through.
Device checks
event and a code 2 shows then check the

# - will appear if a PIN is setup. more than one event. environment.
How to clear 'Exceptions' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 or This shows device hardware The sensor should be
This can be done by removal and replacement of the sensor chamber, by re-allocation of the loop 0000000020 faults. 1-fault code 1 and replaced.
having the sensor or, by using [Clear] function at the panel: more than one fault code 2.
Press Menu On/Off button to select [Test/Eng] -> [Usercode]# -> <etc> -> [Config] -> [Clear]->
[Exception] -> [Enter]. Note cleared codes will return if the conditions are still true.

Condition Codes for S-Quads (Exception / Sub Fault codes)

Condition codes
Normal Sub fault band Fault band
Gen Pos. band
type No. Description
0 1 2 3
1 Optical subfire None Small signal sensed Subfire
E [Check location, state & type] [Check location, state & type]
N
V 2 Heat subfire None Small signal sensed Subfire
I [Check location, state & type] [Check location, state & type]
O
R
N 3 Gas subfire - Small signal sensed Subfire
M [Check location, state & type] [Check location, state & type]
E
N 4 Beam OK - - Obscured for > 1min or Tx
T failure
5 Optical/Gas channel drift or out of OK Close to acceptable limit Out of limits

range [Clean/replace]
S 6 Heat channel drift or out of range OK Out of limits

E [Clean/replace]
N
S
O 7 Optical/Gas channel noisy OK Single HF noise event Multiple HF noise seen
R (High freq) detected (Check location and report)
8 Heat channel noisy (High OK Single HF noise event Multiple HF noise seen
frequency) detected (check location and report)
D 9 device firmware OK Isolated fault Repetitive fault Total failure
Device checks
E [Note/report] [Note / report / replace] [Replace]
V
I 10 device transmission OK Low error rate Medium error rate High error rate
C [Report] [Replace]
E

Pre Fire, Fire and Super fire

Definitions
Condition meaning.. ..and for State 0 it implies
PreFire Fire detection is at a higher sensitivity than the selected STATE. Fire detection that will easily pass the respective EN54 test.
Fire Fire detection at the sensitivity of the selected STATE. Fire detection that is referenced to the respective EN54 test.
SuperFire Fire detection at lower sensitivity than the selected STATE. Fire detection that will not pass the Standards test.
Pre Fire, Fire and Super fire

S-Quad Sensor with VAD - STATES VAD (current range of devices)

S-Quad Sensor with VAD - STATES VAD (current range of devices)
The STATE in which an S-Quad sensor operate can be changed from the default factory set STATE to another STATE during commissioning using the Commissioning tool. The environment in which
an S-Quad device is installed will determine what STATE is used. # - Factory Default STATE ~ EN54 : Part 7 :2000 * EN54 : Part 5 :2002
& The S-Quad with VAD devices are compatible with control panel software (MCC/MCB equal to or greater than V4.52 and LPC equal to or greater than V4.48).
# - factory default settings LPCB

approved Meets ~ EN54-7 : 2000, A1:2002, A2:2006
Device STATE * EN54-5 : 2000, A1:2002
Dual Optical & Heat sensor variant - S4-711
(With VAD) S4-711-VAD-HPR STATE 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *
S4-711-VAD-LPW STATE 5 Medium optical smoke ~ / Class B heat *
S4-711-VAD-HPW STATE 8 Delayed medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat*
(With Speech) S4-711-V
(With VAD & Speech) S4-711-V-VAD-HPR

S4-711-V-VAD-HPW

Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor variant- S4-901
(With Speech & VAD) S4-911-V-VAD-HPR STATE 9 Class A1 heat *
S4-911-V-VAD-HPW
Optical & Heat sensor variant - S4-710
(With Sounder) S4-770-S STATE 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat*
Heat sensor variant - S4-720
(With Speech VAD) S4-720-V-VAD-HPR STATE 0 # Class A1 heat *
S4-720-V-VAD-HPW STATE 5 Class B heat *

Optical sensor S4715 STATE 0 Medium optical smoke
All of the above S-Quad range of devices meet EN54-17:2005 Short circuit isolation plus EN54-18:2005 Input/Output devices for use on the transmission path of fire detection and alarm systems.

S-Quad Sensor with Strobe - STATES (legacy devices)

The STATE in which the S-Quad sensors operate can be changed from the default factory set STATE to another STATE during commissioning. The environment in which the S-Quad device is installed
will determine what STATE is applicable. # - Factory Default STATE ~ EN54 : Part 7 :2000 * EN54 : Part 5 :2002 ¯ - used in current range
&
The release of control panel software (MCC/MCB equal to or greater than V4.41):
If a non defined STATE is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to STATE 0.
The previous release of control panel software (MCC/MCB less than V4.41):
If a non defined STATE is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to STATE 15, which means the device is functionally switched OFF.
Meets ~ EN54 : Part 7 :2000

Device LPCB approved STATE * EN54 : Part 5 :2002
Dual Optical & Heat sensor variant -
S4-711¯ State 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *
(With Strobe) S4-711-ST State 5 Medium optical smoke ~ / Class B heat *
(With Speech) S4-711-VO
State 8 Delayed medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat*
(With Strobe & Speech) S4-711-ST-VO
Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor variant -
S4-911 State 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *
(With Speech & Strobe) S4-911-ST-VO State 9 Class A1 heat *
Optical & Heat sensor variant -
S4-710¯ State 0 # Medium optical smoke / Class A1 heat*
Heat sensor variant -
S4-720¯ State 0 # Class A1 heat *
(With Speech & Strobe) S4-720-ST-VO State 5 Class B heat *
Optical senor - S4-715¯ State 0 Medium optical smoke
All S-Quad range of sensor sounder devices meet CEA 4021, where applicable, and meet EN54-17:2005 Short circuit isolation plus EN54-18:2005 Input/Output devices for use on the transmission path
of fire detection and alarm systems.

S-Quad Heat sensor STATES

# - factory default STATE
Sensitivity
State Definition / Class Application in / Suitable for: a-high- to-e-none
State 0# Class A1 heat Area having high levels of smoke, dust or steam a

State 13 Class A2 heat Area where there is moderate temperature changes plus dust, smoke or steam present b
State 5 High temperature Class B heat Area having high ambient temperature plus dust, smoke or steam present c
State 6 High temperature Class BS heat - with Area where there is rapid temperature changes plus dust, smoke or steam present d
no rate of rise component
State 15 No detection e
S-Quad Dual Optical & Heat / Optical & Heat sensor STATES
Sensitivity
State Definition / Class Application in / Suitable for: a-high- to--j-none
State 3 High sensitivity optical, Clean area or environment, where early detection is required a
Class A1 heat
State 4 Medium sensitivity with no optical spike General area as State 0 with less immunity to steam and dust to facilitate witness test b
protection, Class A1 heat
State 0# Medium sensitivity optical, Class A1 General area c
heat
State 8 Delayed medium sensitivity optical, General application in area with transient steam, dust or smoke present d
Class A1 heat
State 5 Medium sensitivity optical, Class B heat Area having high ambient temperature with low dust, smoke or steam present e
State 2 Low sensitivity optical, Class A1 heat Areas with moderate dust, smoke or heat during working hours when used with timing function f
State 11 Low sensitivity optical, Area having high ambient temperature, plus where moderate dust, smoke or steam present g
Class B heat
State 6 Low sensitivity optical, Area having high ambient temperature that changes, plus moderate dust, smoke or steam h
Class BS heat present
State 12 Class A1 heat only Area where smoke, dust or steam occurs at times I
State 15 No detection j

S-Quad Dual Optical, Heat & CO sensor STATES

Sensitivity
State Definition / Class Application in / Suitable for: a-high- to-h-none
State 1 High sensitivity optical, Class A1 heat, Clean area or environment where early detection is required with false alarm reduction a
high sensitivity gas
State 4 Medium sensitivity optical with spike General area as State 0 with less immunity to steam and dust for ease of testing using artificial b
protection, Class A1 heat, medium smoke in normal operating mode, when test / commissioning mode is not active
sensitivity gas
State 0# Medium sensitivity optical, General area where false alarm reduction is required for comprehensive fire detection c
Class A1 heat, medium sensitivity gas
State 2 Medium sensitivity optical, Applications with moderate dust, smoke (tobacco) or steam d
Class A1 heat, low sensitivity gas
State 9 Medium sensitivity gas, Area where high levels of smoke, dust or steam is often present e
Class A1 heat
State 11 Medium sensitivity optical, Area with high ambient temperature, plus low levels of dust, smoke or steam present f
Class B heat
State 12 Class A1 heat only Area where smoke, dust, steam or gas occurs at times g
State 15 No detection h
S-Quad Optical sensor STATES

Sensitivity
State Definition / Class Application in / Suitable for: a-high- to-f-none
State 3 High sensitivity optical Clean area or environment, where early detection is required a
State 4 Medium sensitivity with no spike General area as State 0 with less immunity to steam and dust to facilitate wittiness test b
protection
State 0# Medium sensitivity optical General area c
State 8 Delayed medium sensitivity optical General area with transient steam, dust or smoke present d
State 2 Low sensitivity optical Area with moderate dust, smoke or steam present e
State 15 No detection f

Beam sensor STATES

States verses distance
Sensor STATES Ideal range

minimum to maximum
4 or 5 2m to 30m
2 or 3 5m to 100m
0 or 1 12m to 100m
State Definition Application

State 0# Default A fire is detected when there is a 50% (3dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
detection 1second and is maintained for 40 seconds, then a fault is registered. This allows the Control panel to differentiate
between a fire and a fault signal caused by accidental obscuration.
State 1 Normal A fire is detected when there is a 50% (3dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
sensitivity 1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fire is registered.
State 2 Medium A fire is detected when there is a 25% (1.3dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
Sensitivity 1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fault is registered.
State 3 Medium A fire is detected when there is a 25% (1.3dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
Sensitivity 1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fire is registered.
State 4 High Sensitivity A fire is detected when there is a 10% (0.5dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
Beam sensor STATES

1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fault is registered.
State 5 High Sensitivity A fire is detected when there is a 10% (0.5dB) fall in signal level, however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than
1 second and is maintained for 40 seconds then a fire is also registered.
State 15 No detection. This is a total disablement of the sensor.

4 - Channel Interface Unit STATES

Interface Unit STATES These 4 - channel interface unit input STATES are applicable for both mains and loop powered
Single channel interface input STATES interface units.
These STATES also apply to loop powered single channel interface. STATE Definition Applications
STATE Definition Application State 0 Default - all Inputs enabled Normal use
State 0 Default - all Normal use State 1 Input 1 disabled Selective disablement and
Inputs enabled enablement of interface input
State 2 Input 2 disabled circuits
State 1 Input 1 disabled Selective disablement and
"
State 3 Inputs 1 and 2 disabled
enablement of interface input circuits
State 4 Input 3 disabled Where an input
Where an input circuit is used for fire circuit is used for fire
detection application, the call points State 5 Inputs 1 and 3 disabled
on the circuits will NOT remain
detection application, the
State 6 Inputs 2 and 3 disabled call points on the loop
operational on disablement of the
circuit. State 7 Inputs 1, 2 and 3 disabled circuit will remain
operational on disablement
State 15 All inputs Interface input disablement State 8 Input 4 disabled
disabled
of the loop circuit.
State 11 Input 1, 2 and 4 disabled
State 13 Inputs 1, 3 and 4 disabled
Interface Unit STATES
State 14 Inputs 2, 3 and 4 disabled

State 15 All inputs disabled interface input disablement

34000 range of sensors STATES (legacy devices)
&
The release of control panel software (MCC/MCB equal to or greater than V4.41):
If a non defined STATE is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to STATE 0.
The previous release of control panel software (MCC/MCB less than V4.41)
If a non defined STATE is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to STATE 15, which means the device is functionally switched OFF.

Optical heat sensor (plus sounder) STATES (34000 range)
These STATES cover the following sensors:
¨ Optical & heat sensor
¨ Optical & heat sensor plus sounder
¨ Heat sounder
For the Heat sounder product range ignore the Optical STATES.
STATES Definition Application

State 0 (LPC approved) Heat Grade 2 Suitable for most applications. Provides smoke detection to meet BS5445:Part 7 and
Optical smoke normal sensitivity provides heat detection to meet Grade 2 as defined in BS5445:Part 5.
State 1 High sensitivity optical Used in areas or situations where airborne smoke or dust is unlikely to occur and therefore
Grade 2 heat a more sensitive detection is available.
State 5 Medium sensitivity optical only Where high ambient temperatures of greater than 40oC are expected in the detection area.
State 8 (LPC approved) Medium sensitivity optical with This state is useful in hotel bedrooms where low levels of signals could occur for short
20 seconds time constant durations. If smoke and heat occur simultaneously, the time delay is effectively overridden
Grade 2 Heat to provide fast detection.
State 10 Medium sensitivity optical with time Similar performance to state 8 but without the time delay overridden. Useful in hotel
delay (20 second time constant) or bedrooms and loading bays where low levels of signals may occur.
Grade 2 heat
State 11 Low sensitivity optical Used for smoke detection in areas where airborne particles or smoke is normally present,
Grade 3 Heat or high temperatures (up to 40oC) can be normally attained.


State 12 (LPC approved) Grade 1 Heat only No optical smoke detection. Can be used where airborne particles or smoke could occur
briefly or at specific times. Optical detection can be used in conjunction with time
State 13 (LPC approved) Grade 2 Heat only
blocks/slots to enable/disable sensor depending on application.
State 14 Grade 3 Heat only
State 15 No detection This state can be used to provide total disablement on a timed or temporary basis.
Heat sensor STATES (34000 range)


State 0 (LPC approved) (Default) Grade 2, rate of rise and Suitable for general use in ambient temperatures up to 40oC. Provides detection to
fixed temperature Grade 2 performance as defined in BS5445 : Part 5.
State 1 (LPC approved) Grade 1, faster rate of temperature Applicable for areas with normally very steady low ambient temperatures. A faster rate
rise as well as fixed temperature of rise can signal a fire below the normal set temperature at 58oC.
State 2 Grade 1, limited rate of rise Applicable for normal ambient temperature where temperature variations are expected
up to 40oC but faster response than grade 2 is required e.g. hotel bedroom.
State 5 High temperature with rate of rise Provides detection as specified by Range 1 BS5445:Part 8 .
State 6 High temperature with no rate of rise Provides detection as specified by Range 1 BS5445:Part 8.
State 15 No detection No detection. This is a total disablement of the sensor.

Zone 'Test' mode (for EN panels only)

Installed equipment tests The Zone Test mode is applicable for EN VIGILON 4/6-loop panel, VIGILON Compact panel and
Preparation VIGILON Compact VA panel only and is used when testing devices in a zone. It allows the
engineer to test zones without having to return to the panel to silence alarms and reset the system.
¨ Check to ensure access will be provided to areas where installed equipment is to be
tested, such as to locked or secure areas. While the panel is in the Zone test mode, following a fire event the alarms sound for 5 seconds and
then automatically the alarms are silenced followed by a panel reset. The panel inhibits the
¨ Ensure all sensor dust covers are removed from sensor devices. operation of delay block functions, network functions, auxiliary and clean contact relay's operation
in Zone test mode.
¨ Tests may be made easier by having: sensor extractor tool, smoke poles, smoke ¨ All zones of the system that are not in zone test mode will operate normally.
canister, heat gun, beam obscuration filter, sensor removal kit and MCP test key, plus ¨ To put the control panel into or out of the 'zone test mode': Press Menu On/Off
keys to open system equipment. Where applicable read the instructions supplied with button and select [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] and enter the Engineering password, this
the test kit. need only be done if an Engineering password is set up. Press <etc> and select [Test]
and then select [Zone] and [On] / [Off]. Now enter the zone
Communication to site occupants number and select [Enter]. The 'Test' LED is lit: Test
¨ Before undertaking any of these tests and to prevent unnecessary building evacuation,
ensure:
• all affected personnel on the site are informed, via a responsible person that the
fire alarm system is being commissioned.
" On completion of all tests, switch Off the [Test] mode and notice the 'Test'
LED also switches Off.
• where there is a link to an alarm receiving centre, the appropriate action should be
taken to ensure they are informed that tests are being carried out on the system. 'Commission' mode (for BS panels only)
The Commissioning mode is applicable for BS VIGILON 4-loop panels only. It places all the zones
Commissioning Tool of the system into test state.
Installed equipment tests

It is much easier for the panel and system to be configured from the Commissioning tool, see the ¨ The 'Commission' mode may be used when testing the system. It allows the engineer
Commissioning tool manual. to test devices without having to return to the panel to perform silence alarms and
reset. While the panel is in the Commissioning mode, following a fire event the alarm
Plant equipment will sound for 5 seconds and then automatically a silence alarm sequence is
performed and thereafter a panel reset.
"
¨ To put the control panel into or out of the 'commissioning mode': Press Menu On/Off
Prior to any functional tests being carried out on the system, all the plant button and select [Test/Eng]. Select [UserCode] and enter the Engineering password,
equipment interfaced to the fire alarm system should be isolated. this need only be done if an Engineering password is set up. Press <etc> and select
¨ Tests should be carried out following customer consent. It may also be necessary to [Commission] and [On] The 'Commission' LED is lit: Commission
.
obtain third-party consent dependent on what plant equipment is connected to the
"
panels auxiliary contacts.
¨ All the tests on plant equipment should be as agreed during the project design stage. On completion of commissioning, switch Off the [Commission] mode and
notice the 'Commission' LED is also switches Off.

Fire Sensors Interface Units
&
1. When testing heat sensors DO NOT use a heat gun for the test in a hazardous
&
1. In some instances it may not be possible to functionally test equipment (plant
environment. equipment) connected to input / output circuits off an interface unit.
2. Manufacturer recommended test equipment and methods must be used to fire 2. Ensure the contact rating of interface output circuits are adequate for the plant
test flame detectors connected via interface unit. equipment load requirement.
Plant equipment
4. When smoke testing fire sensors using artificial smoke, avoid excessive spray ¨ Tests should be carried out on the operation of plant equipment, like lift, escalator,
to prevent accumulation of sticky residue on sensor, see instructions on the door release, fire dampers etc following customer consent. It may also be necessary to
smoke canister. Ensure the 'Test mode' is used when performing smoke test on obtain third party consent.
an S-Quad sensor
¨ All tests on plant equipment should have been agreed during the project design stage.
5. The beam sensors should be tested using obscuration filters to simulate
smoke at the appropriate sensitivity STATE. Tests
¨ Where tests are performed on a interface unit check each each circuit failure is
The BS5839:Part 1 recommends that all sensors are tested for correct operation. indicated at the control panel, such as:
¨ Unless otherwise instructed all sensors should be tested. Each Sensor should also be • Battery disconnection*
checked for any physical obstacles that would inhibit the operation of the sensor in
the event of a fire.
• Mains supply disconnection*
• Input line open circuit
¨ Each Sound and Speech part of the S-Quad and S-Cubed should output the correct • Input line short circuit
signal at the appropriate volume level in accordance with the Standard requirements • Input line detector and MCP fire#
and to meet the site specific needs as agreed with the customer. • Output line open circuit ~
• Output line short circuit ~
¨ The VAD/Strobe part of S-Quad and S-Cubed should operate at the required flash
rate in the event of a fire and is not obstructed. • Output line operation ~
* - not applicable for the loop powered interface units.
# - a fire from a call point or detector connected to an interface input cannot be differentiated.
¨ Each fire sensor should be tested for correct operation in the event of fire.
¨ Each speech/sounder should be tested for correct operation in the event of fire. Keyswitches
¨ Where the interface unit input is from a keyswitch, then the keyswitch should be
Manual Call Points configured for correct operation and tested as per project specification.
¨ Each call point should be tested for correct initiation of a fire event. ¨ Check on operating a keyswitch the confirmation LED, where applicable, is lit to
show operation.

S Cubed Repeat panel (Loop connected)
"
Each loop repeat panel should be tested for the following:
The remote control is only operable when the panel is in the Zone Test
¨ System event messages and indications are given
mode for an EN system or Commission mode for a BS system. ¨ Local fault events, such as Battery and Mains supply disconnection
¨ Alarm controls & Cancel Buzzer operation is possible
Wall Sounder device ¨ Depending on the Mimic Panel

Trouble shooting type of S-Cubed Each Mimic indicator panel should be configured and tested for the following:
If the remote control fails to operate in close device being
proximity to the thinned section of the Sounder
device, then a possible cause may be commissioned check ¨ To confirm fires are indicated
3m - maxim
discharged battery. In which case replace the

battery. to ensure correct ¨ Local fault events, such as Battery and Mains supply disconnection
output sound tone, ¨ Lamp Test
speech message and
• On an A3 Mimic panel by pressing the button on the centre face of the unit
um range
VAD/strobe rate are

given. The S-Cubed • On an A2 mimic panel (Legacy panel) by operating the test key
Thinned
Remote Control
devices should have • On an A4 mimic panel (legacy panel) by inserting a 2mm pin like object (for example a
section
on base
been setup using the small terminal screwdriver) into a hole located on the underside of the panel enclosure.
commissioning tool.
Red LED
Off ¨ The volume of the Mains powered DAU and micro DAU (Legacy devices)
Flash sounder S-Cubed
Steady On
device can be Each Mains powered DAU and micro DAU should be configured and tested for the following:
- + adjusted by using a ¨ Check to ensure correct output sound tone and speech message are given of fire events.
remote control. ¨ Adjust the volume out at speakers on the Speaker circuits using controls on the Mains
¨ Each S-Cubed should powered DAU in accordance with the British Standard requirements and to meet the site

Perform a short press on the Power button
be tested for correct specific needs as agreed with the customer.
to turn On the remote control. The Red LED will
flash x1 every 2 seconds
operation in the event Similarly volume level should be adjusted at each micro DAU to the required setting during
of fire. commissioning.
¨ The sound levels in

Press the function button to toggle between:
Volume function and note the Red LED flashes x1 every 2 seconds VIGILON Compact VA system (Legacy system)
Tone function and note the Red LED flashes x2 every 2 seconds
the areas should be
Press the + button to increase volume or to select the next tone tested in accordance ¨ A 'Fall back' test must be performed to ensure the central messages are announced. This is
with the British achieved by stopping the two loops using the [Test/Eng] menu and then by conducting a
Press the - button to decrease volume or to select the previous tone
Note: The VAD/strobe light on the S-Cubed unit if fitted will flash rapidly when Standard Sound Alarm from the panel. Restart the loop on completion of the test.
the volume is being adjusted using the remote control. requirements and to
Press and hold the Power button to save the adjustments made.
meet the site specific Deviations from standards
The Red LED will remain On whilst the button is held pressed. needs, as agreed with
The data is saved to the device when the tone/speech on the S-Cubed unit
stops briefly. Release the button on the remote control and the the customer. ¨ The results of system tests carried out must be in accordance with the relevant standards
Red LED will switch Off to complete the adjustment process. and project specification.
¨ Any deviations must be documented and reported for approval.

Single Network
Vigilon Compact Network
¨ Each standalone system must first be fully commissioned individually.
A VIGILON Compact network can consist of a number of control panels and network nodes wired ¨ Check that the correct cable is used to wire the network, the installer's manual lists all
together in a secure loop. A secure loop is achieved by installation of a network card in each the approved cables.
VIGILON Compact (VA) panel and VIGILON Compact Network Node to facilitate the network
interconnection of panels and nodes.
Control panel
side 1 side 2
Each standalone system is first commissioned before being networked together with other panels Network card (NC)
Loop processor card (LPC)
and nodes.
RS485 -up to 1.2Km Master Control Board (MCB)
RS485 - up to 1.2Km
The network commissioning process involves systematic introduction of each standalone system to
the network with tests to ensure the network is working.
The whole networked system is then configured and tested to ensure alarms and global controls side 2 side 1
and operates to site requirements.
Master Control Board (MCB)

Control panel

Control panel

"
Network card (NC)

Network card (NC)
Secure
When setting the address switches on the 'network card', ensure the network controller
Network
which can be the network node or panel is given the lowest address.
A network controller is a node that can be connected to a Central monitoring system.

side 1 side 2
All panels in a networked system must operate at the same baud rate, normally this is
38.4K where copper network card is being used. RS485 - up to 1.2Km Control panel RS485 - up to 1.2Km
Network card (NC)
side 2 Loop processor card (LPC) side 1

Wiring the single network Single network without domain bridge
Cable screen
Vigilon Compact
N/C = No connection Control panel
Network Card
N/C N/C
Address 2
Baud 38.4K
0V L2- L2+ 0V L1- L1+ 0V L2- L2+ 0V L1- L1+
PB1A PB1B PB1A PB1B Node 2

Connections for Network card in Connections for Network card in
Card 2 Card 2
MASTER CONTROL BOARD MASTER CONTROL BOARD
Vigilon Compact
Vigilon Compact
Control panel
Control panel
Network Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 1
Network Card
Control Panel Control Panel
Baud 38.4K
Address 3
Node 3 Node 1
Cable screen
Node 4
N/C
Vigilon Compact
Control panel
Network Card
N/C Address 4
Where a multicore cable is being Baud 38.4K
used ensure the unused cores
(cores without signal) are 0V L2- L2+ 0V L1- L1+ 0V L2- L2+ 0V L1- L1+
connected to 0V.

PB1A PB1B PB1A PB1B
The cable screen must Connections for Network card in Connections for Network card in
Card 2 Card 2
be connected to an earth
terminal in the backbox, MASTER CONTROL BOARD MASTER CONTROL BOARD
as shown. Control Panel Control Panel

Network Card for VIGILON Compact - baud and node address switch settings
& The copper network card for use in a Vigilon Compact panel is factory set to 38.4K baud with node address 4. Both node address and Baud rate can be
changed to another other setting by configuring the switches on the Network card.
Component side Node address Baud rate

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
64 off off off off off off off off 2400
1 on off off off off off on off 9600
2 off on off off off off off on 19.2K
3 on on off off off off on on 38.4K
4 off off on off off off
63 on on on on on on
Address Baud
- factory settings
12345
678
on off

Powering-up the Network How to check a Network map

¨ Add one panel at a time starting from the network controller (Node 1) at side 1. ¨ Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Map] -> [NetMap] option to enter the
network card address n.
" It can take a few minutes for the system map to update. The display will provide a list in cabling order the addresses of panels in the
networked system.
¨ For each panel powered-up the network controller will automatically try to establish These are examples of different networks. The lowest address ‘1’ has been given to
communication with the connected equipment.
the network controller.
¨ The network controller will display the status of the network as being started, secure
or non-secure and from now on will monitor and control the network Map information for Network at card 10
communications.
Nodes on side 1
¨ Use disable comms to isolate a panel from the rest of the network, ie it operates at the
network card in an echo mode, select Menu On/Off -> [Control] -> [Disable] ->
1 9 7 6 5
[Comms] and enter the Network Card usually number 4. Nodes on side 2
1 3
This example shows the network is not secure
Map information for Network at card 10

Nodes on side 1
1 9 7 6 5 3 1
Nodes on side 2

This example shows the network is secure

How to check Network Card status Errors meaning

Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Status] -> [Card] and enter the network card address in this Freeblock Free memory blocks available to temporarily store messages
case it is '4'. The display will confirm: waiting to be processed. The maximum number = 199, although it
may drop as low as 175 - 180 on a highly populated network. A
¨ the address of the network card lower value may indicate a high error value and will require
¨ the address of network controller rectification.
¨ and a set of condition codes Fault Finding
¨ The communication path in a secure network will alternate between end 1 (side 1) and
Card 4 Is OK Fault 0:Disable 0:Warning 0
end 2 (side 2) every minute.
Address (0) Version 4.06 5/7/06
Node 3 Controller 1 Baud Rate 38400
Condition 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 198 199 ¨ The network will be non secure until the last panel is connected and powered-up.
High errors
¨ Check cable lengths and type used.
Side 2 Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 UART End Freeblock
type communicating ¨ Check wiring, connections and earthing arrangements. Check the network cable is
Parity/ Parity/ CRC CRC 1 or 2 Check correctly earthed to the equipment.
Framing Framing Timing 0-Rockwell software
errors 1-Phillips
error error
Current 2-Phillips SMT
Only appears ¨ Replace network card at point of failure, where required.
message on Controller
1 error = count of errors
10 but every 1sec 1 error =
¨ Check the addresses and baud rates of the network cards of all the networked panels.
the counter is count of
decremented by 1 100 ¨ It may be necessary to investigate and:
• look at the noise voltage between conductors, screen and earth.

Errors meaning
Parity
Framing
Parity is incorrect, data corrupted.
8- bit transmitted incorrectly and the data line does not return to
" Always reset the Network Card first when rechecking for errors, using
[Test/Eng] -> [Card] ->[Reset] -> Network Card 4.
logic 1 at the end of the transmission.
CRC Cyclic redundancy code. When a message consisting of a number
On completion of the above the networked system may now be configured for network operation,
of 8 bit transmissions is sent, a calculation is carried out to check
for master sectors and global controls to be actioned as per site requirements.
that data corruption has not occurred.
Time out Where an 8 bit transmission block is not fully received, the
error network card will time out ready to receive the next message. A
time out error will also be generated for each parity/ framing error.

Single Network
Single Vigilon Network
¨ Each standalone system must first be fully commissioned individually.
A VIGILON network consists of a number of control panels of standalone systems and network ¨ Check that the correct cable is used to wire the network.
nodes wired together in a secure loop using copper or fibre network cards.
A secure loop is achieved by installation of a copper or fibre network cards in each VIGILON panel
side 1 side 2
and VIGILON Network Node to facilitate the interconnection of panels and nodes. Each standalone Network card (NC) *
system is first commissioned before being networked together with other panels and nodes. Loop processor card (LPC) x 6
RS485 - up to 1.2Km
Input output card (IOC)
Fibre optics - up to 2Km
Local controller card (LCC) Central Monitoring
The commissioning involves systematic introduction of each standalone system to the network and Control panel system
tests to ensure the network is working. RS232
RS485 - up to 1.2Km 15m
Fibre optics - up to 2Km max
side 2 side 1
The whole networked system is then configured and tested to ensure alarms and global controls
Input output card (IOC) x 3 Opt.

operates to site requirements.
Loop processor card (LPC) x 6

Local controller card (LCC)

Control panel
Network Node
Network card (NC) *

Secure * - can be copper or fibre network card
Network card (NC) *

"
When setting the address switches on the 'network card', ensure the network controller
Network
is given the lowest address.

side 1
side 2 RS485 - up to 1.2Km
A network controller is a node/panel that can be connected to a Central monitoring side 2 Fibre optics - up to 2Km
Network card (NC) *
system. RS485 - up to 1.2Km Spare side 1
Fibre optics - up to 2Km Input output card (IOC)
All panels in a networked system must operate at the same baud rate, normally this value Network Node
is 38.4K where copper network cards are being used and 115.2K where Fibre network
cards are being used.

Wiring a Copper network

Cable screen
From
To Next
previous
panel
panel
or node
or node N/C
No
connection
P10 P10 P10

0V1 +VE1 -VE1 0V2 N/C +VE2 -VE2 N/C 0V1 +VE1 -VE1 0V2 N/C +VE2 -VE2 N/C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0V L2- L2+ 0V L1- L1+
0V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve |
Connections for Connections for
Network card in Network card in Connections for Connections for
Socket P8 (Card 6) Socket P8 (Card 6) Network card in Network card in
Socket P8 (Card 6) Socket Card 2 of MCB
(post 08-2006) BACKPLANE (post 08-2006) BACKPLANE
(Pre 08-2006) BACKPLANE
Control Panel Control Panel OLD Legacy Control Panel Compact Control Panel
Wiring a Fibre network

Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 Side 2
Rx (End 2) (End 2) Tx
(End 1) (End 1)
Tx Rx
P7 P4 P6 P5 P7 P4 P6 P5
C8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
P2 P3 P2 P3
BACKPLANE BACKPLANE
Control Panel Control Panel
Links P2 and P3 are booster links.

Normally the links are not fitted, however for
distance exceeding 750m the links must be fitted.

Single network without domain bridge Powering-up the Network

Control panel ¨ Add one panel at a time starting from the network controller, adding one panel/node
IO Card at a time to side 1.
"
all switches to
Off position
Network Card It can take a few minutes for the system map to update.
Address 2
¨ For each panel powered-up the network controller will automatically try to establish
Baud 38.4K
DKC
Address 1
communication with the connected equipment.
Baud 19.2K
¨ The network controller will display the status of the network as being started, secure
Control panel Control panel
Node 2 or non-secure and from now on will monitor and control the network
communications.
Network Card
Network Card
all switches to
all switches to
Baud 38.4K
Baud 38.4K
¨ Use disable comms to isolate a panel from the rest of the network, ie it operates at the
Baud 19.2K
Baud 19.2K
Off position
Off position
Address 3
Address 1
Address 1
Address 1
IO Card
IO Card
Node 3 Node 1 network card in an echo mode, select Menu On/Off -> [Control] -> [Disable] ->
DKC
DKC
[Comms] and enter the Network Card address, usually card 6.
Node 4
Control panel How to check a Network map
Network Card
Address 4
¨ Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Map] -> [NetMap] menu, enter the network
Baud 38.4K IO Card switches must be set to the Off card address, usually card 6 and select [E].
position. The network baud and domain
IO Card
address switch are located on the DKC. The display will provide a list in cabling order the addresses of panels/nodes in the
all switches to These switches must all be set to the same
Off position settings at all the panels / nodes in a single networked system.
networked system without domain bridge.
DKC
Address 1 Here are examples of different networks. The lowest address ‘1’ is normally the
Baud 19.2K
network controller.

Nodes on side 1 of a SECURE NETWORK
1 10 4 24 3 6 2 22 7 23 1
Nodes on side 1 of a NON-SECURE NETWORK

1 10 4 24 3 6
Nodes on side 2 of NON-SECURE NETWORK

1 23 7 22 2

How to check Network Card status Errors meaning

Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Status] -> [Card] and enter the network card number, usually Time out Where an 8 bit transmission block is not fully received, the
this is card number 6 and select [E]. The display will confirm the: error network card will time out ready to receive the next message.
¨ address of the network card Time out error will also be generated for each parity/ framing
error.
¨ address of network controller
¨ and a set of condition codes Freeblock Free memory blocks available to temporarily store messages
waiting to be processed.
The maximum number = 199, although it may drop as low as
175 - 180 on a highly populated network. A lower value may
indicate a high error value and will require rectification.
Card 6 Is OK Fault 0: Warning 0
Network (0) Version 4.xx 31/04/15
Address 5 Controller 5 Baud Rate 38400 Fault Finding
condition 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 198 199
¨ The communication path in a secure network will alternate between end 1 (side 1) and
end 2 (side 2) every minute.
¨ The network will be non secure until the last panel is connected and powered-up.
Side 2 Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 UART End Freeblock

High errors
type communicating
Parity/ Parity/ CRC CRC 1 or 2 Check
¨ Check cable lengths and type used.
Framing Framing Timing errors 0-Rockwell
1-Phillips
software ¨ Check wiring, connections and earthing arrangements. Check the network cable is
error error
2-Phillips SMT correctly earthed to the equipment.
Current Only appears
message on Controller ¨ Replace network card at the point of failure.
1 error = count of
10 but every 1sec
errors
1 error =
¨ Check the addresses and baud rates of the input / output and network cards of the
the counter is count of networked panels.
decremented by 1 100 ¨ It may be necessary to escalate an investigation to look at the noise voltage between
conductors, screen and earth.
Errors
Parity
meaning
Parity is incorrect, data corrupted.
" Always reset the Network Card first when rechecking for errors, using
[Test/Eng] -> [Card] ->[Reset] -> Network Card number, normally Card 6 and select [E].
Framing 8- bit transmitted incorrectly and the data line does not return
to logic 1 at the end of the transmission. The networked system may now be configured for network commands to be actioned, such as
master sectors and global controls as per site requirements.
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code. When a message consisting of a
number of 8 bit transmissions is sent, a calculation is carried
out to check that data corruption has not occurred.

Star network using Domain bridge IO cards

Multiple Vigilon Networks
Domain Bridge using Input Output card If remote sites are
Two or more VIGILON networks can be connected together at domain bridge IO cards by having a residential it is not Previous Next
Previous Next
direct RS232 connection, Modems, Fibre Optics units or NPORT units. This allows the display of permissible to rely on Domain
events at any control panel/Network node in the connected networks. domain bridge link to 1
call fire brigade
Previous Next
Two networks using Domain bridge IO card Network Node IOC IOC
- 4 IOC Cards IOC
- 1 Network Card Domain Domain

Previous Next
Previous Next
Bridge Bridge
DOMAIN Domain
Bridge
BRIDGE Previous Next
Previous Next
Previous Next
Previous Next
Previous Next
Previous Next
IOC IOC IOC

Previous Next
Previous Next
Domain Domain Domain

IOC RS232 IOC
2 3 4
15m max Previous Next Previous Next
Previous Next
Previous Next
Previous Next
Modem

VIG-DOM-MODEM
NC FO Fibre NC FO
DOM DOM
Optics VIG-NC-DOM-FO
Computer
network
VIG-NPORT-100

IO domain bridge network switch settings
Control panel Switch settings on cards inside Control panel

IO Card EN54 Vigilon panels / Nodes IO Card
all switches to where Domain Bridge IO Card all switches to

Off position is used to network the fire systems Off position
Network Card Network Card
Address 2 Address 2
Baud 38.4K Baud 38.4K
DKC
Domain 1 Domain 2 DKC
Address 1 Address 2
Node 2 Node 2
Baud 38.4K
Address 1
Network Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 1
Network Card
Domain Bridge
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Baud 19.2K
Address 1
DKC
Baud 19.2K
Address 2
DKC
Node 1 Node 1
Node 3 Node 3

Network Card Network card address setting is for the Node address Network Card
Domain Bridge IO Card address setting is for the Domain address
Address 3 Address 3
Baud 38.4K Baud rate settings must be set as shown in this diagram. Baud 38.4K
IO Card IO Card
all switches to all switches to

Off position Off position
IO Card switches must be set to Off,
DKC these are now located on the DKC. DKC
Address 1 Address 2

Message routing
The Main controller card
(Card 0) will accept all messages
Message routing at Card 0 from Master group 1 and route messages
Messages MCC
All events - 1 to domains 2 and 3
Domain 2 - Card 6 via the network card (Card 6).
to other Domain 3 - Card 6 Message routing at Card 0
Network All events - 1
Domains Message routing at Card 6 The Network card (Card 6) Domain 1 - Card 15
IOC All events - 1 will accept all messages Domain 3 - Card 15
Domain Domain accessed via LCC: 2,3 to and from Master group 1
bridge domains 2 and 3 via Message routing at Card 6
Message routing at Card 15 All events - 1
the local controller card (Card 0).
All events - 1 Domain accessed via LCC: 1,3
IOC Domain accessed via LCC: None
Domain -------------------------------- The Domain bridge IO card Message routing at Card 15
bridge (Card 15) has no need to All events - 1
route messages Domain accessed via LCC: None
--------------------------------
as there is nothing connected.
NC
Messages Control panel

from
the local Zones 1
Fault
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fire
16
32
Zones 1
Fault
17
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 2004
10
26
Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4

11
27
12
28
13
29
15:45
14
30
15
30
Fire
16
32
Verify
Sounder
CB253
network
15:45
Power Fault Verify Test CB254
Disablement
Previous Next Power
GENT 2004
Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 CB253
Test CB254
Disablement
Previous Next Power
Messages
from other
Network MCC
Domains
Domain 1 Domain 2
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32 Fault Fire
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 15:45
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32 Fault Fire Power Fault Verify
Fault Fire 15:45
15:45 Power Fault Verify System Fault Vigilon Fire System Sounder
Fault Fire Power Fault Verify GENT 2004
15:45 System Fault Vigilon Fire System Sounder Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 CB253
Power Fault Verify System Fault Vigilon Fire System Sounder GENT 2004
Control
GENT 2004 Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 CB253 Test CB254
System Fault Vigilon Fire System Sounder Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 CB253
Previous Next
GENT 2004 Test CB254 Disablement Power
Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 CB253 Test CB254
Disablement
Previous Next Power
Disablement
Previous Next Power
Test CB254
Disablement
Previous Next Power
IOC
Domain panel 15
bridge
1
IOC

Domain
bridge
Message routing at Card 0 Zones 1
Fault
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
Fire
16
32
NC
15:45
Power Fault Verify
All events - 1
GENT 2004
Test
Disablement
Previous Next
CB254
Power
Message routing at Card 0

Domain 2 - Card 15 All events - 1
Domain 1 - Card 15
Domain 3 - Card 1 Domain 2 - Card 15
Control panel Message routing at Card 6
Messages to
All events - 1 Message routing at Card 6
the local Domain accessed via LCC: 2,3 All events - 1
network Domain accessed via LCC: 1,2
All events - 1 Zones 1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
30
16
32
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Domain accessed via LCC: 2

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
All events - 1
Fault Fire
Domain 3
Power Fault Verify
15:45
Power Fault Verify System Fault Vigilon Fire System Sounder
GENT 2004
System Fault Vigilon Fire System Sounder Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 CB253
GENT 2004
Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 CB253 Test CB254
Disablement
Previous Next Power
Test CB254
Disablement
Previous Next Power
Domain accessed via LCC: None

Message routing at Card 15 --------------------------------
All events - 1
Domain accessed via LCC: 3
--------------------------------

Domain bridge message passing tests Domain bridge using Fibre Optic network card
To check the domain bridge connections and to ensure messages Up to 64 small VIGILON networks can be connected together in a secure loop by using domain bridge fibre optics network card
can be passed between networks the following must be done. (VIG-NC-DOM-FO), with the card installed in socket P7 of the backplane. This allows the display of events at any control panel in
Trigger an event in a network, such as a fault. the connected networks.
¨ Check the event is passed on to the connecting networks
and is displayed at the networked control panels
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Delay Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4 Cb253
Test CB254
Disablement Previous Next Power
¨ Repeat the test at each network to establish message Zones 1
Fault
17
Power Fault
System Fault
Delay
Test
Disablement
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
Vigilon Fire System

GENT 20XX
9
25
Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4
Previous Next
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
15:45
14
30
15
30
Fire
Verify
Sounder
Cb253
CB254
Power
16
32
Network # Fibre Optics Domain bridge network card

(VIG-DOM-NC-FO) installed in P7 of backplane
passing between networks domain bridge
¨ Finally back up the cards of the panel including the

Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
#
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Network card and IO card to the Memory. This ensures

Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
the panels of each network knows the location of # Fibre optic Fibre optic
network controller, ie the domain bridge connection Panel/Node patch panel patch panel Panel/Node
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
point.
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
Tx
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Tx
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
Rx Rx
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254

Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
#
Fibre patch cable
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
#
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
GENT 20XX
Fault Fire
15:45
Test CB254 Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 2004
Test CB254
Zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32 Disablement
Previous Next Power
Fault Fire
15:45
Power Fault Verify

GENT 20XX
Test CB254
The above diagram shows small fibre networks connected together by a fibre network domain. It is equally possible to mix small
copper networks and small fibre networks together in the manner shown above to a network domain.

FO Domain Network switch settings

Node 3 Node 2 Node 3 Node 2
Control panel
Control panel
Baud 19.2K
Address 3
DKC
Baud 19.2K
Address 1
DKC
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Baud 19.2K
Address 3
DKC
Baud 19.2K
Address 1
DKC
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 3
Network Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 2
Network Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 3
Network Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 2
Network Card
Control panel
Control panel
Node 1 Node 1
Network Card Network Card
Address 1 Domain 2 Address 1 Domain 1
Control panel
Control panel
Domain3
Control panel
IO Card IO Card IO Card Switch settings for Cards
all switches to all switches to all switches to inside an EN54 Vigilon panel
Off position Off position Off position where a Fibre Optic Network Domain
Network DOM FO Network FO Network
Bridge Card is installed
Card DOM Card DOM Card
Address 3 Address 2 Address 1
Baud 230.4K Baud 230.4K Baud 230.4K
DKC DKC DKC

Domain 4
Network DOM
Fibre Optics Network domain ring Network DOM
Network DOM
Card Card Card
Control panel
Control panel
Network card address is the Node address
IO Card IO Card IO Card IO Card address is the Domain address

Baud rate settings must be as shown.
Control panel
all switches to all switches to all switches to

Off position Off position Off position
The FO Network DOM card switches must
DKC Network Card Network
Address 4 Address 1
be set to the domain address
Card
Domain 5 Domain 6 Address 1
Baud 38.4K
DKC DKC
Address 5 Address 6
Node 3 Node 2 Node 3 Node 2
Node 1 Node 1
Control panel
Control panel
Control panel
Control panel
Baud 19.2K
Address 5
DKC
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Baud 19.2K
Address 5
DKC
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 3
Network Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 2
Network Card
Baud 19.2K
Address 6
DKC
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Baud 19.2K
Address 6
DKC
Off position
all switches to
IO Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 3
Network Card
Baud 38.4K
Address 2
Network Card
Appendix A-1 - Menu maps for EN54 (V4) Vigilon panel

The menu options [Control], [SetUp], [Info] and [Test/Eng] are accessible on pressing the MENU ON/OFF button.
EN Vigilon Control panel with MCC/MCB at

V4.53 or higher
Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1

Access level 2a
[Control] Menu map 1 [Control] [Set Up] [ Info ] [ Test/Eng ]
Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open
Access level 2b Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
Access level 3 Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
[Enable] [Disable] [Printer] <etc> [Sector] [MSector] [FARE] <etc> [Sounder] [Aux Rly] [Timeslot] <etc> [DelayBlk]
# ~ ~ ~ ~
See Control
menu map 2-1 { Params
1-255 } [Action] { Params
1-207 } [Loop] { Params
1-16 } [Delay][On] [Off] { Params
1-16 } [Delayed] [End] [Stop]
if off if on
{ Params
MM:SS
0-10min
} [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
HH:MM:SS } [On] [Off]
[On] [Q] [Test] [Paper Fd] [Off] [Q]
[Off] [On] { Params
1-2 } [On] [Off]
8 Line [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] Key
feeds
[E] [C] [Q] [Off] [Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3] [E] [C] [Q] [E] = [Enter]
****** P R I N T E R T E S T ******
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH [C] = [Cancel]
IJKLMNOPQRSRUVWXYZ[=]^-àbcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{|} [Q] = [Quit]
# - The ‘Print’ option will only appear if a [E] [C] [Q]

printer is connected to the panel.
Access level 3
[Pause] [Build] <etc> [Sound] [Silence] [Reset] <etc> [Verify] [Digital] <etc> [Audio] [Voice] <etc> [StartMA] [StopMA] [UserCode]
~ ~ ~ #
*{
[Off] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] See Control See Control
{ Params
1-255 } [On] [Off] menu map 2-4 menu map 2-2 Params
1-263 } [On] [Off]
Access level 2b Access level 2a
[All] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] { Params
0-30sec } [E] [C] [Q] [Node] [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255 } [E] [C] [Domain]
* - These menu options will appear on
a Vigilon Compact VA panel only.
{ Params
1-255 } [E] [C] [Q] #- This menu option will appear on a Vigilon panel
when a D1 system is connected.
~ - These menu options are not applicable for a Network node.
[Sensing] [IO Line] [Sounders] <etc> [Sector] [Zone] [Group] <etc> [Build] [MAlarm] [MSector] <etc> [FARE] [FPE] [AuxRly] <etc> [Comms] [Audio] <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
{ Params
1-4 } [Device]
{ Params
1-32 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-255 } [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-15 } [E] [C] *
See Control
[Port] menu map 2-3
{ Params
0-3 } [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
} [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-2 } [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-128 } [E] [C] [Q] 1-255
Access level 2b

EN Vigilon Control panel with MCC/MCB at V4.53 or higher

[Control] Menu map 2-1 to 2-4 Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
Control

Control Access level 2b Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
menu map 2-4
menu map 2-1
[Sector] [Digital]
Access level 3 Access level 3 ~ [Option] This option will only be displayed with Freeblocks
switched On, see Test Engineering
{ Params
1-4 } [On] [Off] [Pulse]
Key
[E] = [Enter]
{ Params
1-207 } [Loop] [C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
[Off] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3]

{ Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-15 } [Device]
[From] [E] [C][Q] [From] [E] [C][Q] [From] [E] [C][Q] { Params
} [Loop]
1-207
[Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3] [Off] [Sig1] [Off] [Sig1] [Sig2] { Params

1-8 } [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
EN Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Control panel only with MCB at V4.53 or higher
Control Control
menu map 2-2 menu map 2-3
[Audio] [Audio]
Access level 3
[Music] [Message] [Aux Msg] <etc> [Alm Msg] [Micphone] [PA] <etc> [PA] [Music] [Per Msg]
[Off] [On] { Params

0-31 } [Message]
[Off] [On] [Off] [On] Access level 3
Tone
[E] [C] [Q]

[E] [C] [Q] { Params
0-31 } [Alm Zone] { Params
1-10 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-10 } [E] [C] [Q]
Message
Access level 2b
Access level 2b { Params
1-10 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-10 } [E] [C] [Q]


[Set Up] Menu map 1 Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
Access level 2a
[Control] [Set Up] [Info] [Test/Eng] Access level 3 Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
These options will only be displayed with Freeblocks
[Option]
Access level 2b [UserCode]
[SetClock] <etc> [Modify] [Enter] # [Save] <etc> [Assign] [Remove] [Set Up] <etc> [Action] [Deaction] <etc> [Backup] [Recover] [Protect] <etc>
[NVM Card] [NVM Card]

See Setup See Set up See Setup
[Next] [Retard] [Advance] [Enter] [E] [C] [Q] menu map 2-1 menu map 3 menu map 2-2
# - The [Save] option will only appear under the customer password at [En] [Dis]
(access level 2), which is used to save changes to labels and clock settings.
[Label] [Sound] [Period] <etc> [Signal 1] [Signal 2] [Signal 3] <etc> [E] [C] [Q]
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
[Sector] [MAlarm] [Buzzer]

[Sounder] [Output] { Params
0-15 }
[NVM Card] [SD Card] { Params
0-15 }
[NVM Card] [SD Card]
{ Params * *
1-32 }
[Loop]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Disable]
{ Params
1-8
} [Action] [NoAction] /[Enable] Enter upto 8 FAB/SAB pairs
[E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
* - [SD Card] option is for Vigilon Compact panel

[NoAction] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] { Params
1-2s }
[E] [C] [Q] only when a SD Card is fitted.
Access level 3
[E] [C] [Q]
~ - These menu options are not applicable at a Network node.
[MCP] [IO Line] [Device] <etc> [Zone] [Local] [Custom] <etc> [Auto Fire] [Man Fire] [MCP]; <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~
[E] [C] [Q] Key

[E] [C] [Q] [E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
{ Params
1-4 }
[Device] Enter Label
[Q] = [Quit]
{ Params
1-207
} [Loop] {Params
1-128 }
[E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
Enter Label
{ Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q]


[Set Up] Menu map 2-1 and 2-2 Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
Setup Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open

menu map 2-1

[Assign] [Remove]
Access level 3
[Device] [IO Line] [MCP] <etc> [Sector] [Group] [DelayBlk] <etc> [MAlarm] [AuxRly] [Build] <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
{ Params
1-207 }
[Loop] { Params
1-4 } [Device] { Params
1-32 }
[Loop] { Params
0-128 }
[MGroup] { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Sound]
1-255
[Silence] [Reset]
{ Params
1-8
} [Sector] [FPE] <etc> [Zone] [Group] <etc> { Params
1-207
} [Loop] { Params
1-8 } [MSector] [AlmZone] { Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]

1-8 } [Sector] { Params
1-255 }
1-16 }
[MSector] { Params
1-2 }
[MSector]
{ Params
1-32 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-128 } 1-32 } { Params { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]
1-10 }
[E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
Applicable for Vigilon

Compact VA only
Setup
menu map 2-2
[Action] [Deaction]
Access level 3
[Sector] [MSector] [DelayBlk] <etc> [AuxRly] <etc>

~
{ Params
1-32 }
[Loop] { Params
1-255 }
[MSector] { Params
1-2 } [Sector] [Fault] [Disable]
~
{ Params
1-8
} [Sector] [DelayBlk] { Params
1-255
} [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] { Params
1-16 }
[Sector] [DelayBlk] { Params
1-32
} [Loop]
{ Params } [Loop] { Params } [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-32
} [Loop]
{ Params } [E] [C] [Q]
1-32 1-16 1-8
{ Params
1-8
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
Key
[E] = [Enter]
1-16
} [E] [C] [Q] [C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]

EN Vigilon Control panel with MCC/MCB at Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
V4.53 or higher Set up
Key
[E] = [Enter]
menu map 3
[Set Up] Menu map 3 [Set Up]
[C] = [Cancel]
[Q] = [Quit]
Access level 2b
Access level 3
Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
Access level 3
[Device] [FARE] [Build] <etc> [TimeSlot] [DelayBlk] [Zone] <etc> [Messages] [Global] [Sector] <etc> [DST] [Verify] [AuxRly] <etc> [Resound] [Audio] <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
{ Params
1-207 }
[Loop] { Params
1-16 }
[Day] [Enable] [TimeBlok]
See Set Up
{ HH:MM:SS
Params
} [Disable] menu Map 4-2 See Set Up menu Map 4-3
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
where
0 = remove
See Set Up {HH:MM:SS

Params
1-16 }
[Action] [Delayed]
Menu map 4-1 { Params } [Delayed] [Off] [On]

{ Params
1-32 }
[Loop] 1-2
{ Params
0-15 } [E] [C] [Q] MM:SS
0-10min
{ Params } [Sounder] { 0-10min
Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
1-8 MM:SS
[Mon] [Tue] [Wed] <etc> [Thu] [Fri] [Sat] <etc> [Sun] [And] [Or]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Off] [On]
[E] [C] [Q] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] <etc> [Off] [NoAction] <etc>
[E] [C] [Q]

[From] [E] [C] [Q] [From] [E] [C] [Q] [From] [E] [C] [Q]
~ - These menu options are not applicable at a Network node. [Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3] [Reset] [Silence] [Sound] [Verify]
{ 0-10min
Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
[Off] [Sig1] [Off] [Sig1] [Sig2] MM:SS
[Input] [Output] [Both] [None]

{ Params
1-207 }
[Loop] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params } [State] [TimeBlok] <etc> [SAFE] [S Cubed] <etc>

[Card] [Device] { Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q]
1-8 ~ MGroup
enable (on)
[Enable] [Disable] [Start] [End]
[Volume] [Signal] [Soft St]
{ Params
0-15 } disable
[State]
(off) { Params
0-15 }
[Output] [Link] [Unlink] { Params
1-207 }
[Loop]
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
16-100 } [E] [C] [Q] 01:00 0 25-31 3 1 0
[All] [Fire] { Params
} [Output] [Link] [Unlink] (HH:MM Day Date 1 -
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q] 1-8 Date 2 month offsets)
[Find Dev] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] [E] [C] [Q] { Params

1-8 }
[E] [C] [Q] [All] [Fire] [Off]
MGroup [MGroup] [Auto Zone] [ManZone]
{ Params
0-255 }
0-100 }
[Step] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-255 }
[E] [C] [Q] Voice/Tone { Params [E] [C] [Q] { Params [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-100 }
[E] [C] [Q] 1-8 } 1-128 }
number

V4.53 or higher Set up Access level 2b Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
menu map 4-1
[Set Up] Menu map 4-1, 4-2 and 4-3 [Build] Access level 3 Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
[Option] Option only displayed with freeblock ON
Access level 3
{ Params
1-255 }
[Trigger] [Action] [Label]

Enter text to be displayed
[IO Line] [TimeBlk] [Sector] <etc> [MSector] [Channel] [None] <etc>
~ ~ ~
[Display] [Print] [Both] [None]
{ Params
1-48
} [Device] { Params
1-32
} [Loop] { Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Device]
1-6
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-207
} [Loop] { Params
1-8
1-207
} [Loop]
[Start MA] [Stop MA]+ [NoAction] [UserCode]
{ Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-15 }
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] Access to whole
of [Control] menu
[Reversb] [Not Revs]

Key ~ - These menu options are not applicable at a Network node.
[E] = [Enter] + - Not a reversible action
[C] = [Cancel] [E] [C] [Q]
[Q] = [Quit]
Set up Set up Set up
menu map 4-2 menu map 4-3 menu map 4-3
[Zone] Access level 3 [Audio] Access level 3 [Resound]
~ ~
{ Params
1-128 }
[Mode] [TimeBlok] [Task] [PA] [Music] [Microphone] <etc> [Aux Msg] <etc> [Per Msg] <etc> [Resound]
[Zone] [1stDev] [AllDev] { Params

1-8 } [Trigger] [Remove] [A] [B] [Tone] [Fire] [Sound] [Delay]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255
} [Sensors] { Params
1-31 }
[E] [C][Q] [Off] [On] [Off] [On] [Stop] [Pause] [Time] [Action]
{ Params } [Action] [Deaction]

{ Params
1-3 } [Tone] [Message]
0-3 [PreFires]
{ Params [E] [C] [Q]

0-15 } { Params
0-31 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-3
} [Fires] { Params
1-10 }
[E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-3
} [SuperFires] [Action] [Deaction] <etc> [Slot] [Interval] <etc>
[Action] [Deaction] [TimeBlock]
{ Params [E] [C] [Q] { Params

1-8 } { Params
1-10 } 0-255 }
[E] [C] [Q] [Tone] [Message] [TimeSlot] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-10 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
0-15 } [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-31 }
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [E] [C] [Q]
0-15
These menu options are for a Vigilon Compact VA panel only

V4.53 or higher [Control] [Set Up] [Info] [Test/Eng] Access level 2b Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
[Info] Menu map [Display] [Print]
These options will only appear if a printer is fitted.
[Active] [Historic] <etc> [Events] [Label] [UserCode] [TimeAvg] [Status] [Map] <etc>
[E] [Card] [Node] [MCP]

~
[IO Line]
~
[Device] <etc> [Zone]
~ ~
[Local] <etc> { Params
1-6 }
[Device] [Loop Map] [Net Map]~
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Node] { Params
1-4 }
[Device] [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-207
} [Loop]
{ Params
1-8
} [Device] [E] [Q] { Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params} [E] [C] [Q]
1-255 } {Params
1-128 }
[E]
{ Params } [Loop] [E] [C] [Q] 1-8
1-207 1-207
- The [SD Card] option is for a Vigilon Compact panel

[P] [N] [Q]
Access level 2a
[R] [P] [N] [C] * only when an SD Card is fitted.
1-8
~ - will only appear if a network card is fitted in the Control panel
and are not applicable at a network node.
[Fault] [Disable] [Warning] <etc> [Supervis] [Exception] [HistFire] <etc> <etc> [Sounders] <etc> [TimeSlot] [DelayBlk] [AuxRly] <etc> [Build] [SD Card]
~ ~
*
[E] [Card] [Node] [Active] [Log] { Params
1-100 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Test] [Config] [Start]
{ Params
0-15 } [E] { Params
1-255 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-16
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [Card] [Node]
Default
{ Params } [E] Sig1 65 00 65 00 65 00 65 00 10
1-255
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [E] Sig2 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 15 { Params
1-2
} [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
Access level 2b Sig3 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 15
[P] [N] [Q]
[P] [N] [Q]
[Device] [Sector] [Card] <etc> [Zone] [Group] [Network] <etc> [SectLink] [DelayLink] Key <etc> [DST] <etc> [FARE] [FPE] <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ [E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel] [Audio]
{ Params
1-32
} [Loop] { Params
1-32
} [Loop] [Q] = [Quit]
[E] [C] [Q]
~
[E] [C] [Q]
[P] = [Previous] [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-128
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q] [N] = [Next]
[Alm Zone]
{ Params
1-207
} [Loop]
Audio Control Example
[MGroup] <etc> [Message] [Global] <etc>
[MSector] [MSLink]
{ Params
1-10
} [E] [C] [Q] Music Off
Microphone Tone 2
{ Params} [E] [C] [Q] { Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Node]
[Card] [Device]
[E] [C] [Q] Aux Msg 2,9 2,10 2,14
1-8
{ Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q] { Params } [E] [C] [Q]
PA Tone 2
1-255 PA Alm Zone A : 1
{ Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Domain] { Params } [E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Loop] PA Alm Zone B : 1
0-15 1-207 Music TimeBlock: 0
Music Alm Zone: 1
{ Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q] These options for are for a
Vigilon Compact VA panel only

V4.53 or higher Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open
[Test/Eng] Menu map 1 [Control] [Set Up] [Info] [Test/Eng] Access level 3 Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
[DispTest] [UserCode] These options will only be displayed with Freeblocks
[Option]

Access level 3
[Loop] [Remote]± [Card] [Network] <etc> [Config] [Test] [Commissn] <etc>
~ AL2b ~
[Message] [Remote]+ <etc> [Comms] [Global] [Routing] <etc> [FreeBlok] [PSU] [Datalog] [Test]
see Test/Eng [On/Off] [No Reset] [No Silence]
menu map 2-1
[Previous] [Next] [E] [R] [Q] [Off] [On]
{ Params
1-255 }
1-255
} [Enter] [Domain] [On/Off]
Off Controller Card 1 to 15
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-255
} [Enter] [Domain]
[E] [C] [Q] [Off] [On] [No Reset] [No Silence]
[Reset] [Init] [Update]#
Enter message to be displayed ~ ~ / [Reset]
Note: Bt2 and BC2 [Zone]
{ Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params } [Card] [Port] are only applicable
[E] [C] [Q]
for 6 Loop panel
1-255
Typical values:
{ Params
1-128 }
[E] [C] [Q]
Enter message to be displayed
[NVM Card] [SD Card] # [1] [2] [Both] Mns DC Bt1 BC1 Bt2 BC2 MA1 MA2 Ear Lpv
4/6 Loop panel 214 141 206 206 0 0 127 74 60 221
{ Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q] 2 Loop panel 206 138 200 203 0
2 Loop VA panel 195 139 202 206 0
0
0
74
75
74
75
65 197
65 198
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
Displayed on 4/6 Loop panel: ‘PSU at V1.00'
0-3
} [E] [C] [Q] Displayed on 2 Loop panel: ‘PSU at V2.05’
Displayed on 2 loop VA panel: ‘Audio Control Unit V1.10’
[Clear] [NewPass] [Buzzer] <etc> [Zone] [Language] [Label] <etc> [Comms] [Display] [Delayblk] <etc> [Radio]^ <etc> [Bypass] [Co-incid] [Delay] <etc>
~ ~long labels ~
see Test/Eng
[Fault] [Disable] [Exception] [All] [Contrast] [Zone]
menu map 2-2 [Off]
{ Params
1-128 }
[Sensors] [All Dev]
[Off / On]
Enter an
access code [Zone] [Group]
[E] [Card] [Node] [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q] [P] [N] [E] [Off] [On] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params [E] { Params } [E] [P] [N] [E]
0-15
} 1-255
Range 0-31
[Disable] [Fault] [Fire] <etc> [Supervis] [Build] <etc> [E] [C] [Q] [Mode] [Reset]
(default 15)
{ Params
MM-SS
0-10
} [E] [C] [Q]
[P] [N] [Q] [Off/On]
{ Params
0-15 }
[Device]
Key
[E] [C] [Q] English - Espanol - Portugues - Cestina - Brazilian -Slovene -Greek [E] = [Enter]
[Off] [On] [Flashing] { Params
1-207
} [Loop]
[C] = [Cancel]
~ - These menu options are not applicable at a Network node ~ ~
[Q] = [Quit]
# - This option is only applicable at a Vigilon Compact panel fitted with a SD card [P] = [Previous]
+ - This option is only applicable at a Vigilon panel [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q] [N] = [Next]
^ - This option is only applicable if Radio devices are fitted in the system
± - This option will only appear on a Vigilon panel when at Access level 2b


[Test/Eng] Menu map 2 Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
Test/Eng Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open
menu map 2-1
[Loop]
Access level 3
[Allocate] [Stop] [FindDev] <etc> [Gain] [Align] [AutoGain] <etc> [Simulate] [Repair] <etc>
{Params
1-8 } [Start] [Flame] [Beam] {Params
1-207 }
[Device] [PreFire] [Fire] [SupFire] { Params
1-8 } [Loop]
{Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
0-7 }
[Device] { Params
0-63 }
[Device] {Params
1-207 }
[Loop] {Params
0-6 } [Device] [E] [C] [Q]
Access level 2b
{Params { Params } [Loop] { Params } [Loop]

{Params { Params
1-207 }
[Loop]
{Params
1-207 } } 1-207 }
[E] [C] [Q] 1-207 1-207
1-8
[E] [C] [Q] [Loop]
{ Params
1-8
1-8
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q] {Params } [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
Test/Eng
menu map 2-2 [N] [P] [E]
[Comms] Access level 3 Gain clock period 50008
[Card] [Address] [Domain]

0-15
{ Params
1-255
0-255
} [E] [C] [Q]
Card 0 (MCC/MCB) for other cards
{ Params
0-3 } [E] [C] [Q]
PORT
[Baud]
[Mode] [Baud] [N] [P] [E] Factory default Port settings

with Control Panel [Card 0]
[N] [P] [E] As Switches having:
MCB 50 MCB MCC
RS485 Port 0 - dedicated Rpt !
600
1200 Port 0 Port 0
RS232 Port 1 Std - Printer - Flt/Fire 1800
RS232 Port 2 Universal - Ascom- Off 2400
3600
USB Port 3 4800
7200 Key
9600 Port 1 [E] = [Enter]
MCC 19200 [C] = [Cancel]
RS232 Port 0 - Off - Std - Printer - Flt/Fire - 38400 Port 2/3 Port 1
57600 [Q] = [Quit]
Universal Ascom [P] = [Previous]
115200
RS485 Port 1 - Std - Off 230400 [N] = [Next]
USB Port 3 - Std 460800
Note: Port 0 and Port 1 are associated with IO Card
fitted in slot P2, settings viewed via MCC status.

Appendix A-2 - Menu maps for BS (V3+) Vigilon panel

The menu options [Control], [SetUp], [Info] and [Test/Eng] are accessible on pressing the MENU ON/OFF button.
BS Vigilon Control panel with MCC at V3.97 or higher
Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
[Control] Menu map 1 Access level 2a Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open

[Control] [Set Up] [ Info ] [ Test/Eng ]
[Enable] [Disable] [Printer] <etc> [Sector] [MSector] [Aux Rly] <etc> [Sounder] [Digital] [Timeslot] <etc> [DelayBlk]
# ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
See Control
menu map 2-1 { Params
1-4 } [On] [Off] [Pulse] { Params
1-16 } [Delay][On] [Off] { Params
1-16 } [Delayed] [End] [Stop]
if off if on
{ Params
1-207 } [Loop]
{ Params
MM:SS
0-10min
} [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
HH:MM:SS } [On] [Off]
[On] [Q] [Test] [Paper Fd] [Off] [Q]
{ Params
1-2 } [On] [Off] { Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q]
8 Line [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] Key
feeds
****** P R I N T E R T E S T ******
[E] [C] [Q] [Off] [Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3] { Params
0-15 } [Device] [E] = [Enter]
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH [C] = [Cancel]
IJKLMNOPQRSRUVWXYZ[=]^-àbcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{|} { Params
1-207 } [Loop] [Q] = [Quit]
# - The ‘Print’ option will only appear if a [E] [C] [Q]

printer is connected to the panel.
Access level 3 { Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q]
~ - These menu options are not applicable
for a Network node.
[Pause] [Build] <etc> [Sound] [Silence] [Reset] <etc> [Verify] <etc> [StartMA] [StopMA] [UserCode]

{ Params
1-255 } [On] [Off]
Access level 2a
[All] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] { Params
0-30sec } [E] [C] [Q] [Node] [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-255 } [E] [C] [Domain]
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-255 } [E] [C] [Q]
[Sensing] [IO Line] [Sounder] <etc> [Sector] [Zone] [Group] <etc> [Build] [MAlarm] [MSector] <etc> [AuxRly] [Comms] <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
{ Params
} [Device] { Params
} [E] [C] [Port]
1-4
{ Params
1-32 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-255 } [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] 0-15
{ Params
0-3 } [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-2 } [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-128 } [E] [C] [Q] 1-255
Access level 2b
~ - These menu options are not applicable for a Network node.

BS Vigilon Voice Alarm Control panel with MCC at V3.97 or higher

[Control] Menu map 2-1
Key Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
[E] = [Enter]
Control Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open
[C] = [Cancel]
menu map 2-1 Access level 2b Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
[Q] = [Quit]
[Sector]
Access level 3 Access level 3 Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
{ Params
1-32 } [Loop]
{ Params
1-8 } [Action]
[From] [E] [C][Q] [From] [E] [C][Q] [From] [E] [C][Q]
[Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3] [Off] [Sig1] [Off] [Sig1] [Sig2]
[E] [C] [Q]


[Set Up] Menu map 1 Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
Access level 2a
[Control] [Set Up] [Info] [Test/Eng] Access level 3 Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
[Option] These options will only be displayed with Freeblocks
Access level 2b switched On, see Test Engineering

[UserCode]
[SetClock] <etc> [Modify] [Enter] <etc> [Assign] [Remove] [Set Up] <etc> [Action] [Deaction] <etc> [Backup] [Recover] [Protect] <etc>
# [Save]
[NVM Card]
See Setup See Set up See Setup
[Next] [Retard] [Advance] [Enter] menu map 2-1 menu map 3 menu map 2-2
{ Params
0-15 }
[NVM Card] [En] [Dis]
[Label] [Sound] [Period] <etc> [Signal 1] [Signal 2] [Signal 3] <etc> [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
[Sector] [MAlarm] [Buzzer]

[Sounder] [Output]
{ Params
1-32 }
[Loop]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Disable] # - The [Save] option will only appear under the customer password at
{ Params
1-8
} [Action] [NoAction] /[Enable] Enter upto 8 FAB/SAB pairs
(access level 2), which is used to save changes to labels and clock settings.

[NoAction] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] { Params
1-2s } [E] [C] [Q]
Access level 3
[E] [C] [Q]
[MCP] [IO Line] [Device] <etc> [Zone] [Local] [Custom] <etc> [Auto Fire] [Man Fire] [MCP]; <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~
[E] [C] [Q] Key

[E] [C] [Q] [E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
{ Params
1-4 }
[Device] Enter Label
[Q] = [Quit]
{ Params
1-207
} [Loop] {Params
1-128 }
[E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
Enter Label
{ Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q]


[Set Up] Menu map 2-1 and 2-2
Setup
menu map 2-1
[Assign] [Remove]
Access level 3
[Device] [IO Line] [MCP] <etc> [Sector] [Group] [DelayBlk] <etc> [MAlarm] [AuxRly] [Build] <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
{ Params
1-207 }
[Loop] { Params
1-4 } [Device] { Params
1-32 }
[Loop] { Params
0-128 }
[MGroup] { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Sound]
1-255
[Silence] [Reset]
{ Params
1-8
} [Sector] [Zone] [Group] { Params
1-207
} [Loop] { Params
1-8 } [MSector] { Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-32 }
1-8 } [Sector] { Params
1-255 }
1-16 }
[MSector] { Params
1-2 }
[MSector]
{ Params
1-128 }
1-32 }
1-255 }
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]

Setup
menu map 2-2
[Action] [Deaction]
Access level 3
[Sector] [MSector] [DelayBlk] <etc> [AuxRly] <etc>

~
{ Params
1-32 }
[Loop] { Params
1-255 }
[MSector] { Params
1-2 } [Sector] [Fault] [Disable]
~
{ Params
1-8
} [Sector] [DelayBlk] { Params
1-255
1-16 }
[Sector] [DelayBlk] { Params
1-32
} [Loop]
{ Params } [Loop] { Params } [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-32
} [Loop]
1-32 1-16 1-8
Key
{ Params
1-8
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q] [E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
[E] [C] [Q] [Q] = [Quit]
{ Params
1-16
} [E] [C] [Q]


[Set Up] Menu map 3 Set up
menu map 3 Access level 3 Menus accessible with panel door open and AL3 password
[Set Up]
Access level 3
[Device] [AuxRly] [Build] <etc> [TimeSlot] [DelayBlk] [Zone] <etc> [Messages] [Global] [Sector] <etc> [DST] [Verify] <etc> <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~ ~

{ Params
1-16 }
[Day] [Enable] [TimeBlok]
See Set Up
See Set Up
Menu map 4-1 { HH:MM:SS
Params
} [Disable] menu Map 4-2
{HH:MM:SS
Params
1-16 }
[Action] [Delayed]
{ Params { Params
1-32 }
[Loop]
MM:SS }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
0-10min
{ Params
1-8 } [Sounder] { 0-10min
Params
} [E] [C] [Q]
[Mon] [Tue] [Wed] <etc> [Thu] [Fri] [Sat] <etc> [Sun] [And] [Or] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] <etc> [Off] [NoAction] <etc> MM:SS
[Off] [On]
[E] [C] [Q]
[From] [E] [C] [Q] [From] [E] [C] [Q] [From] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-2
} [Delayed] [Off] [On] [E] [C] [Q]
[Sig1] [Sig2] [Sig3] Key
{ 0-10min
Params
} [E] [C] [Q] [Off] [Sig1] [Off] [Sig1] [Sig2]
[Reset] [Silence] [Sound] [Verify]
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
MM:SS
[Q] = [Quit]
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Input] [Output] [Both] [None]
{ Params
1-207 } [Loop] ~ - These menu options are not applicable at a Network node.
{ Params } [State] [TimeBlok] <etc> [SAFE] [S Cubed] <etc>

[Card] [Device] { Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q]
1-8 ~ MGroup
enable (on)
[Enable] [Disable] [Start] [End]
[Volume] [Signal] [Soft St]
{ Params
0-15 } disable (off)
[State]
{ Params
0-15 }
[Output] [Link] [Unlink] { Params
1-207 }
[Loop]
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
16-100 } [E] [C] [Q]
[All] [Fire] { Params } [Output] [Link] [Unlink]
01:00 0 25-31 3 1 0
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q] 1-8
(HH:MM Day Date 1 -
[Find Dev] [Signal1] [Signal2] [Signal3] [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-8 }
[E] [C] [Q] [All] [Fire] [Off] Date 2 month offsets)
MGroup
[MGroup] [Auto Zone] [ManZone]
{ Params
0-255 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
0-100 } [Step] [E] [C] [Q]
Voice/Tone { Params [E] [C] [Q] { Params [E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-255 }
1-100 }
[E] [C] [Q] 1-8 } 1-128 }
number

BS Vigilon Control panel with MCC at

V3.97 or higher Set up
menu map 4-1
[Set Up] Menu map 4-1 and 4-2 [Build]
Access level 3
{ Params
1-255 }
[Trigger] [Action] [Label]
Enter text to be displayed

[IO Line] [TimeBlk] [Sector] <etc> [MSector] [Channel] [None] <etc>
~ ~ ~
[Display] [Print] [Both] [None]
{ Params
1-48
} [Device] { Params
1-32
} [Loop] { Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Device]
1-6
[E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-207
} [Loop] { Params
1-8
1-207
} [Loop]
[Start MA] [Stop MA] * [NoAction] [UserCode]
{ Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-15 }
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q] Access to whole
of [Control] menu
[Reversb] [Not Revs]

Key ~ - These menu options are not applicable at a Network node.
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel] [E] [C] [Q]
[Q] = [Quit]
Set up * - Not a reversible action
menu map 4-2
[Zone] Access level 3
~
{ Params
1-128 }
[Mode] [TimeBlok] [Task]
[Zone] [1stDev] [AllDev] { Params

1-8 } [Trigger] [Remove]
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
1-255
} [Sensors]
{ Params
0-3
} [PreFires]
{ Params
0-15 } [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-3
} [Fires]
{ Params
0-3
} [SuperFires]
[E] [C] [Q]

BS Vigilon Control panel with MCC at Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
V3.97 or higher [Control] [Set Up] [Info] [Test/Eng] Access level 2b Menus accessible with panel door open and AL2 password
[Info] Menu map [Display] [Print]
These options will only appear if a printer is fitted.
[Active] [Historic] <etc> [Events] [Label] [UserCode] [TimeAvg] [Status] [Map] <etc>

[E] [Card] [Node] [MCP]
~
[IO Line]
~
[Device] <etc> [Zone]
~ ~
[Local] <etc> { Params
1-6 }
[Device] [Loop Map] [Net Map]#
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Node] { Params
1-4 }
[Device] [E] [C] [Q] { Params
1-207
} [Loop]
{ Params
1-8
} [Device] [E] [Q] { Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q]
# - will only appear if
{ Params { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q]
1-255 } { Params } [E] [C] [Q] a network card is fitted
[E]
{ Params
1-207
} [Loop] {Params
1-128 }
[E] [C] [Q] 1-8 1-207 in the control panel
Access level 2a [R] [P] [N] [C]

[P] [N] [Q] { Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q]
[Fault] [Warning] <etc> [Supervis] [SubFault] [HistFire] <etc> <etc> [Sounders] <etc> [TimeSlot] [DelayBlk] [AuxRly] <etc> [Build]
~ ~
[E] [Card] [Node] [Active] [Log] { Params

1-100 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[Test]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] { Params
1-255 }
[E] [C] [Q] [Config] [Start]
{ Params
1-16
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [Card] [Node]
{ Params } [E]
1-255
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [E] Default { Params
1-2
} [E] [C] [Q]
Sig1 65 00 65 00 65 00 65 00 10
Access level 2b Sig2 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 15
[P] [N] [Q] Sig3 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 15
[P] [N] [Q]
[Device] [Sector] [Card] <etc> [Zone] [Group] [Network] <etc> [SectLink] [DelayLink] <etc> [DST] <etc>
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ - These menu options are not applicable
at a Network node.
{ Params
1-32
} [Loop] { Params
1-32
} [Loop] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-128
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-207
} [Loop]
[MGroup] [MSector] [MSLink] <etc> [Message] [Global] <etc>
{ Params} [E] [C] [Q] { Params

0-15
} [E] [C] [Node]
[Card] [Device]
[E] [C] [Q]
1-8
{ Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q] { Params } [E] [C] [Q] Key
1-255
{ Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Domain] { Params } [E] [C] [Q] { Params } [Loop]
[E] = [Enter]
[C] = [Cancel]
0-15 1-207
[Q] = [Quit]
{ Params
1-255
} [E] [C] [Q] [P] = [Previous]
{ Params
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q] [N] = [Next]

BS Vigilon Control panel with MCC at Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
V3.97 or higher Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open
[Test/Eng] Menu map 1 [Control] [Set Up] [Info] [Test/Eng]
[DispTest] [UserCode] These options will only be displayed with Freeblocks
[Option]
[Loop] [Remote]±
Access level 3
[Card] [Network] <etc> [Config] [Test] [Commissn] <etc>
~ AL2b ~
[Message] [Remote]+ <etc> [Comms] [Global] [Routing] <etc> [FreeBlok] [PSU] [Datalog] [Test]
see Test/Eng [On/Off] [No Reset] [No Silence]
menu map 2-1
[Previous] [Next] [E] [R] [Q] [Off] [On]
{ Params
1-255 }
1-255
} [Enter] [Domain] [On/Off]
Off Controller Card 1 to 15
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q]
{ Params
1-255
} [Enter] [Domain]
[E] [C] [Q]
[Reset] [Init] [Update]#
[Off] [On] [No Reset] [No Silence]
Enter message to be displayed
~ ~ / [Reset]
{ Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
{ Params } [Card] [Port]
[Zone]
1-255
[E] [C] [Q]
Enter message to be displayed Typical values:
{ Params
1-128 }
[E] [C] [Q]
[NVM Card] [1] [2] [Both]
Mns DC Bt1 BC1 Bt2 BC2 MA1 MA2 Ear Lpv
[E] [C] [Q]

{ Params
0-15
} [E] [C] [Q] 4 Loop panel 214 141 206 206 0 0 74 74 60 221
{ Params
0-15 }
[E] [C] [Q] Displayed on 4 Loop panel with PSU at V1.00’

0-3
} [E] [C] [Q]
[Clear] [NewPass] [Buzzer] <etc> [Zone] [Language] [Label] <etc> [Comms] [Display] [Delayblk] <etc> [Bypass] [Co-incid] [Delay] <etc>
~ ~long labels ~
see Test/Eng
[Fault] [Warning] [SubFault] [All] [Contrast] [Zone]
menu map 2-2
{ Params
1-128 }
[Sensors] [All Dev]
[Off] [On]
Enter an
access code
[E] [Card] [Node] [E] [C] [Q]
[Off]
{ Params
MM-SS
0-10
} [E] [C] [Q]
[E] [C] [Q] [P] [N] [E]
{ Params [E] { Params } [E] [P] [N] [E]
0-15
} 1-255
Range 0-31 [Zone] [Group]
[Warning] [Fault] [Fire] <etc> [Supervis] [Build] <etc> [Off] [On]
(default 15)
[P] [N] [Q] [Off/On] [E] [C] [Q] [E] [C] [Q]
Key
[E] [C] [Q] English - Espanol - Portugues - Brazilian - Slovene [E] = [Enter]
[Off] [On] [Flashing]
[C] = [Cancel]
~ ~
~ - These menu options are not applicable at a Network node [Q] = [Quit]
+ - This option is only applicable at a Vigilon panel [P] = [Previous]
[E] [C] [Q] [N] = [Next]
± - This option will only appear on a Vigilon panel when at Access level 2b


[Test/Eng] Menu map 2 Access level 1 No menus are accessible at AL1
Test/Eng Access level 2a Menus accessible with panel door open
menu map 2-1
[Loop]
Access level 3

[Allocate] [Stop] [FindDev] <etc> [Gain] [Align] [AutoGain] <etc> [Simulate] [Repair] <etc>
{Params
1-8 } [Start] [Flame] [Beam] {Params
1-207 }
[Device] [PreFire] [Fire] [SupFire] { Params
1-8 } [Loop]
{Params
1-8 } [E] [C] [Q] { Params
0-7 }
[Device] { Params
0-63 }
[Device] {Params
1-207 }
[Loop] {Params
0-6 } [Device] [E] [C] [Q]
Access level 2b
{Params { Params } [Loop] { Params } [Loop]

{Params { Params
1-207 }
[Loop]
{Params
1-207 } } 1-207 }
[E] [C] [Q] 1-207 1-207
1-8
[E] [C] [Q] [Loop]
{ Params
1-8
1-8
1-8
} [E] [C] [Q] {Params } [E] [C] [Q]
1-8
Test/Eng
menu map 2-2 [N] [P] [E]
[Comms] Access level 3 Gain clock period 50008
[Card] [Address] [Domain]

0-15
{ Params
1-255
0-255
} [E] [C] [Q]
Card 0 (MCC/MCB) for other cards
{ Params
0-3 } [E] [C] [Q]
PORT
[Baud]
[Mode] [Baud] [N] [P] [E]

Factory default Port settings
[N] [P] [E] As Switches with Control Panel having:
MCC 50 MCC
RS232 Port 0 - Off - Std - Printer - Flt/Fire - !
600
Universal Ascom 1200 Port 0
RS485 Port 1 - Std - Off 1800
USB Port 3 - Std 2400
Note: Port 0 and Port 1 are associated with IO Card 3600
fitted in slot P2, settings viewed via MCC status. 4800
7200 Key
9600 [E] = [Enter]
19200 [C] = [Cancel]
38400 Port 1
57600 [Q] = [Quit]
115200 [P] = [Previous]
230400 [N] = [Next]
460800

Latching fault events

Appendix B - Message Action List The following faults are identified as latching events.
This appendix lists all the messages that are likely to be displayed at the VIGILON control panel / ¨ Slave devices lost
Network Node. There are some fault events that are not self clearing and will require manual
intervention. ¨ Loop allocation fault
Clearable fault events
The following faults are identified as clearable fault events. ¨ Invalid loop configuration
¨ FLASH corrupt
How to clear a latching fault event
¨ Invalid device configuration To clear a latching fault it is necessary to re-allocate the loop circuit.
¨ Too many errors Repairable fault events

Can be cleared but will not reset the counters. Repairable fault events are those that require manual intervention to clear the fault, for example
after following tests:
¨ Unrecoverable Tx fault ¨ Loop (partial) short circuit.
¨ Checksum error ¨ Ground break
FLASH Configuration data and FLASH in sensors
Appendix B - Message Action List
How to clear a repairable fault event

¨ NVM recovery failures or map mis-match To repair the fault at the control panel press the Menu on/Off button -> [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]
-> enter your PIN (where necessary) -> [Loop] -> <etc> -> <etc> -> [Repair] -> [Loop] -> enter
How to clear a clearable fault event the loop number on which the fault resides -> [Enter].
To clear the fault at the control panel press the Menu on/Off button -> [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode]
-> enter your PIN (where necessary) -> <etc> -> [Config] -> [Clear] -> [Fault] -> [Enter], then
scroll through to the fault you wish to clear and select [clear].

Message Action list

The messages displayed at the control panel, network node or loop repeat panels are given here in an alphanumerical order to provide guidance:
¨ on a 'fault message'
¨ the likely meaning of the message
¨ along with suggestions on what initial actions may be taken to rectify the problem.
" Only the messages that are applicable will appear on the display of the control panel, network node or loop repeat panels. Additionally the display will identify the panel
where the event was first detected.
¨ The term device was previously referred to as outstation.
Message associated with.. meaning.. ..possible action

A spurious FIRQ at MCC / MCB There is glitch on the MCC hardware that appears on Clear and ignore single occurrence.
card x (main control card/board) the backplane / MCB.

A spurious IRQ at MCC / MCB There is glitch on the MCC / MCB hardware. Clear and ignore single occurrence.
card x (main control card/board)
A spurious NMI at MCC / MCB There is glitch on the MCC / MCB hardware. Clear and ignore single occurrence.
A spurious SWI2 at MCC / MCB There is glitch on the MCC hardware. Clear and ignore single occurrence.
A spurious SWI3 MCC / MCB There is glitch on the MCC / MCB hardware. Clear and ignore single occurrence.
at card x (main control card/board)
Access fault at Any Card Card cannot talk to the MCC / MCB local controller. Replace card if the fault keeps reoccurring.
card x Could also be caused by excessive network
messages. Investigate message passing.
ACIA Failed at Network Card or Communication chip failure or the FABs and SABs are Reset the card and replace if it fault keeps
card x MCC / MCB corrupt. reoccurring.
Alarms silenced MCC / MCB Silence alarms button has been pressed. -
(main control card/board)


Alarms sounded MCC / MCB Sound alarms button has been pressed. -
Alarms Verified MCC / MCB Alarms verify button has been pressed. -
Alarm Zone Disabled / LPC -
Enabled at card x (loop processor card)
Allocation : Double LPC Two devices are given the same address. Loop breaker Check the device wiring. The device may be
Allocated card x (loop processor card) (relay contacts) are fused ‘micro welded’ together faulty, replace if required.
number y on loop z (closed) or there is a bad connection.
Allocation : Hw fault LPC Loop breaker relay has not closed or serial line End-2 Check the device wiring. The device may be
card x number y on (loop processor card) is faulty or relay is stuck i.e. closed. The device may faulty, replace if required.
loop z not be correctly fitted.
Allocation : Map LPC Loop wiring is incorrect, eg a sub loop may have been Check and rewire if necessary. This fault can
error card x number y (loop processor card) wired on a spur. also be device failure.
on loop z
Allocation : memory LPC Loop processor has run out of memory during Software error or more likely a faulty RAM
Overflow at card x (loop processor card) allocation / when starting a loop. chip.
number y on loop z
Allocation : not LPC An attempt to allocate a loop when it is already Wait and if it takes longer than 10 minutes then
ready at card x (loop processor card) allocating. reset the loop card.
Allocation : OK at LPC The loop circuit has been successfully allocated. -

Card n : Allocated x (loop processor card)
Allocation started LPC No devices found on End-1 or End 1 of the loop is Check the wiring to the first device or last
from end 2 at card x (loop processor card) open circuit. device on the loop.
Allocation : Too many LPC Allocated more than 200 devices or the device is Replace incompatible devices used on other
card x number y on (loop processor card) restricted for use with the particular software version. systems ie:32000 or SMS device found in
loop z system.
Allocation : Tx fault LPC Invalid reply from the device. Check the device. Also check cable routing and
card x number y on (loop processor card) length (measure resistance and capacitance of
loop z cable).


ASCII Device is LPC Failure of the Control panel to communicate with If applicable, connect the power supply or
faulty number x on (loop processor card) Repeat / Mimic panel. The power supplies to these RESET the Master Repeat Card in the Repeat
loop y panels may not be connected. and Mimic panel. If necessary replace the
card/software.
Back up NVM Data is being copied from cards and stored onto the -
(non volatile memory) on NVM.
backplane or MCB
Back up required NVM Data must be saved to memory Back up data to the memory.
(non volatile memory) on
backplane or MCB
Battery discharged Power supply This indicates the failure of battery load test. The ADC Check load test and the battery condition.
value should be equal to or less than normal - 9.
Battery disconnected/ Power supply A disconnection is indicated when the ADC value from Normally it should be = 234 (27.4V)
restored the battery is equal to or less than 130. To give a restored indication the ADC value
should = Vbatt 1/6x256/5.

Baud rate x at card y MCC / MCB / Network Card Baud rate set has been read. If required, change the baud rate.
being Initialised at NVM Memory is being set up by the MCC / MCB (main -
card x (non volatile memory) on control card/board), ready for use.
backplane or MCB
Buffer full at card x Any Card Software error. -
Buffers out of step Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.
at card x
Ignore single occurrence. Record the event in
the log book.
Call point glass is Device Call point has been operated when the device is Replace the glass, if necessary.
broken disabled.
number x loop y
Call point on Device Mains powered interface input has been triggered by -
interface unit conventional MCP, value of input is equal to or less
operated / restored than 6V.


Call point open cct Device Monitored base does not see end-of-line unit. There is Check the internal wiring, there may be a loose
number x on loop y a bad connection to MCP. connection.
Call point Device Break glass has been broken or operated with a test Replace the break glass to restore the call point
operated/restored key. or remove the test key, whichever is applicable.
number x loop y
Call point short cct Device Call point contacts are short circuit. Check the call point contacts and internal
number x loop y wiring.
Card found/lost at Any Card The card has been found/lost. If lost then it is locked There may be a hardware fault on card or
card x out. backplane. Investigate and rectify.
Card n recovered NVM Data recovered to a card from the NVM. A card data -
/Card n backed up (non volatile memory) on has been backed up to the NVM.
backplane or MCB
Chamber Removed Device Device chamber has been removed. Replacing the chamber will cause a replaced
/Replaced number x on indication.
loop y
Charger Fault Panel Charger circuit has failed. Replace the PSU.
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
Charger Fault EN54 System device power Charger circuit has failed at a loop device. Replace the board (having the power supply) on
number x on loop y supply the loop device.
(Repeat, Mimic or mains
powered interface)
Charger Restored Panel power supply Charger circuit is working again. -
Charger Restored EN54 System device power Charger circuit at the loop device is working again. -
number x on loop y supply
(Repeat, Mimic or mains
powered interface).
Chk=4.874 NVMC 41874 NVM The memory is read only. Disable the write protect using the [set up]
Flag=0 (non volatile memory) on menu.
NVM is write backplane or MCB
protected at Card x


Clock changed / Clock MCC / MCB Time and date has been altered or no time has been If necessary, set the clock using the set up
not set up (main control card/board) entered. menu.
CO sensor faulty Device There is a fault with the CO sensor in an S-Quad. Replace device
CO sensor near end of Device The CO cell is nearing the end manufacturer Replace the device
life recommended life expectancy in an S-Quad.
CO sensor restored Device The CO sensor fault has been restored in an S-Quad -
Command build MCC / MCB Command build has been switched ON (activated) or If necessary switch ON/OFF the command
activated / (main control card/board) switched OFF (deactivated). build using the [control] menu.
deactivated
Command build enabled MCC /MCB This is an automatic or manually controlled action. If necessary, manually enable/disable the
/ disabled (main control card/board) command build using the [control] menu.
Comms enabled / MCC / MCB Card communications have been enabled or disabled. If necessary, manually enable/disable the
disabled at card x (main control card/board) Comms using the [control] menu

Network Card Control panel has been isolated from the network.
Comms Supply Fault Network node The communications power supply has failed. Replace the power supply unit.
Comms supply Restored Network node The communications power supply has been restored. -
Communications MCC / MCB Communication to a particular panel or to external Check the wiring.
started / stopped at (main control card/board) equipment linked to the panel (eg Laptop having the
card x commissioning tool) has started / stopped.
Control passed at Network - -
card x
Corrupted NVM memory Any Card Checksum failure on configuration at midnight. Recover data and record event in the log book.
at card x If it reoccurs then replace the card.
DC Power fail / Power supply The ADC of output 27V regulator is -
restored normally=146(28.5V).


DC too high / DC too Power supply The DC supply is: Check the mains supply and battery wiring.
low
Too high if greater than 164 (32V)
Too low if less than 102 (20V)

Delay block setup MCC / MCB A Delay Block has been configured. -
Delay blocks Cleared MCC / MCB - -
Detection Zone LPC The detection zone has been enabled or disabled If necessary, manually enable/disable the
Disabled/Enabled at (loop processor card) automatically or manually. detection zone using the [control] menu.
card x
Detector on interface Device Conventional detector connected to an input of a mains -
unit number x on powered interface input has triggered. Value of the
loop y channel z input is equal to or less than 10V.
Device Address Device Device SAFE address has changed. If necessary rectify the device SAFE address.
changed from x
number y on loop z
Device Battery Fault Radio (Plexus) Device Radio (Plexus) device has a battery failure Check the batteries at the Radio (Plexus) device
using the Battery Condition Indicator tool and
replace the batteries if necessary
Device batteries need Radio (Plexus) Device The batteries inside a Radio (Plexus) device needs to Replace the batteries in the Radio (Plexus)
replacing be replaced device
Device battery Radio (Plexus) Device The batteries inside a Radio (Plexus) device are Replace the batteries in the Radio (Plexus)
discharged nearing end of life. device
Device battery fault Device The battery has failed the load test at the device, for a Check and replace the battery if necessary.
/restored mains powered interface the value is equal to or less
than normal - 2V.


Device Battery OC Device Failure of fuse or battery wiring is OC on products like Check and replace if necessary to restore.
number x on loop y mains powered interface unit.
Normal value = 27.4V

Value is equal to or less than 16V (OC) / greater than
17V (Restored).
Device Enabled / LPC Device has been enabled or disabled manually or If necessary manually enable or disable the
Disabled at Card x (loop processor card) automatically. device.
Device Fault number x ACU Fault input has been asserted. Check remote equipment wired to the fault
on loop y Audio Control Unit input.
Device Gain set to x Beam devices Confirmation of a change in gain setting. -

number y on loop z (can also be a Flame device -
no longer supported)
Device inoperative Radio (Plexus) Device The Radio (Plexus) device batteries are too low for Use the Battery Condition Indicator tool to

device to operate correctly determine if the batteries in the Radio (Plexus)
Device require replacing, if necessary replace
the batteries.
Device Mains Failed / Device Failure of mains supply to mimic/repeat /mains Check mains supply connections and the mains
Restored number x powered interface unit. The value of rectified DC is fuse. When the rectified DC is greater than
loop y equal to or less than 8V i.e. failed. 24V it is restored.
Device Mains too high Devices like: Mimic / Repeat Failure of device mains supply. Check the power supply and replace it if
/ low number x loop y / Mains powered interface The value of rectified DC is too high / low i.e in the necessary
unit region of 30V / 17V.
Device Moved Radio (Plexus) Device The Radio (Plexus) device has been tampered with The Radio (Plexus) device has been moved
from the original installed lobation or there has
been changes in the area that affect the device
operation.
Device power Fault / Device The failure of internal power supply rail. Replace the device.
Restored number x on
loop y


Device power Device Internal power rail of mains powered interface unit has Replace the device
too high/ a value of rectified DC equal to or greater than 32V
restored too low (high) / less than 30V (restored)
/restored number x on DC equal to or less than 24V (low) / greater than 26V
loop y (restored)
Device Replaced is LPC Tx fault re-finding device. Check connections to device / base and also
faulty number x on (loop processor card) device type etc.
Loop y
Device Replaced LPC The replaced device is now communicating with the -
number x loop y (loop processor card) panel.
Device Returned Radio (Plexus) Device Radio device has been returned to it's base The moved Radio (Plexus) Device has been
returned to its original installed position.
Device soft address; Device Device primary address does not match SAFE address. Check loop configuration.
SAFE: number x on
loop y
Disables Cleared MCC / MCB All disablements have been removed from the panel. -
Duplicate SAFE Device Two devices on a loop have the same SAFE address. Change one of the SAFE address.
Address error:
number x on loop y
Earth Fault/ Fault Power supply The ADC value to earth of the 8V regulator: A clear indication is normally given when ADC
Cleared is equal to or greater than 5 (for a +ve fault) is equal to 64.
or less than 3 ( for a -ve fault).
Earth Fault at Card n LPC There is an earth fault present before allocation. Use the Loop Diagnostic Tool to diagnose the
Loop n: 0v resistance (2Km Loop Processor Card) Note: An Earth fault post allocation is indicated as earth fault condition and rectify it.
is xxR, L is y Earth fault.
Loop n: Earth is aaa,
bbb (99)
Enabled Aux relay x MCC / MCB The auxiliary relay has been enabled or disabled If necessary, manually enable/disable the
Disabled Aux relay x (main control card/board) automatically or manually. auxiliary relays using the [control] menu.


End switching normal Network Network card is back to normal operation, (see also -
at card x end switching disabled)
Exception number x on (Exceptions also referred to Change noted in the environment of the device Check the condition codes.
loop y as Sub-Fault)
Loop Processor Card
Excessive LPC There were more than 10 reply errors in one day. Check screening and electrical noise in area of
transmission error (loop processor card) operation + check loose connections to loop.
rate (More than 16 reply errors will cause the device
isolation.)
Too many errors: lost
device or loop split
External Fire at MCC / MCB There is a Fire on another panel in a network. Investigate the fire.
panel n (main control card/board)
FARE Enabled / Device The FARE device has been enabled or disabled Manually enable or disable the FARE device if
Disabled number z on manually or automatically. required.
loop y Zone x

FARE Activated / Device The FARE device has been activated / deactivated If appropriate manually deactivate the FARE
Deactivated manually or automatically. device. The deactivation happens automatically
number z on loop y on resetting the system after a fire event.
zone x
FARE Faulty/Restored Device A 'faulty' message is given when there is a fault A 'restored' message is given when the FARE
number x loop y associated with FARE equipment. equipment fault is investigated and rectified.
zone w
FARE loop x, device y Device This information shows the FARE Interface is on -
loop x and is device y.
Fast scan started Data logging Fire sensor has detected a change on its input. The message is normally given when the data
number x on loop y logger is connected.
channel z
Fault cleared Warning MCC / MCB Fault or warning has now gone. -
cleared (main control card/board)


Fire number n loop y LPC Pattern match is equal to a Fire or MCP operated or -
channel z (loop processor card) conventional detection on IO line of interface operated.
Fire reset MCC / MCB The Fire reset button has been pressed. -
Flash memory checksum Device Speech Memory Checksum Error Replace the device
error
FPE Enabled / Device All FPE Interface devices on loop x have been enabled Manually enable or disable all FPE Interface
Disabled at card x or disabled manually or automatically. devices if required.
FPE w: x, y, z Device This information shows the FPE Interfaces on loop w -
and are devices x, y and z.
Full keyboard Removed MCC/ MCB / DAC/ MRC The keyboard has been ‘removed’ (is not fitted). Check the cable connections to the keyboard to
/ Fitted number x bring about the ‘fitted’ message.
loop y
Group Enabled / MCC / MCB A group has been automatically or manually disabled If necessary, manually enable/disable the group
Disabled (main control card/board) or enabled. using the [control] menu.

High Error rate at Network High number of communication errors. Check network wiring and connections.
Card x
Incompatible Card Any Card There is a card software conflict. Fit card with compatible software.
Version at card x
Interface Failed at MCC / MCB The interface timer chip has failed. Clear the fault and ignore single occurrence.
card x (main control card/board) Replace the card on multiple failures.
Interface input - Device IO line fault. Check the wiring and restore the input for
fault / restored normal operation.
number x on
loop y channel z
Interface Input Fire Device Interface IO line triggered a fire event. Check the wiring and restore the input for
number x on loop y normal operation.
channel z


Interface input not Device The input line continues to trigger. Check devices on the IO line.
Reset number x on
loop y channel z
Interface Input OC / Device The end-of-line is not seen. Check the wiring. The device may have been
restored removed, if so refit the device to restore.
Interface input Device Fixed extinguishant interface unit input has been Follow the FE system reset procedure to release
operated / released triggered (applicable for old systems only). the input.
number x on loop y
channel z
Interface input SC / Device The interface wiring is short circuit. The value of input Check the interface wiring and rectify to restore
restored number x on is equal to or less than 2V. the input.
loop y channel z
Interface output SC Device The value of output is equal to or less than 50% for SC Check the wiring and restore the output circuit.
or OC or Restored or is TBA for OC.
number x on loop y
channel y

Intermittent Fault at Any Card A fault has been picked up by the MCC / MCB (main Replace the appropriate card if the fault keeps
card x control card/board). reoccurring.
Invalid configuration LPC Loop recovered with freeblocks ON. This is not allowed. Switch OFF the freeblocks
(loop processor card) and reallocate.
Device FLASH incorrectly programmed Replace the device

Invalid configuration LPC Loop recovered with freeblocks ON or Loop This is not allowed. Switch OFF the freeblocks
at card x (loop processor card) configuration faulty, possibly after upload from and reallocate.
Commissioning Tool.
Invalid message / LPC The message/reply received cannot be understood. The Ignore single occurrence and record in the log
reply received at (loop processor card) communication can be from a Repeat, Mimic, book.
card x Networked system.
Invalid message/reply Network Card The message/reply has not been understood from other Ignore for single occurrence and record in the
at card x panels. log book.


Invalid task delay at Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.
card x
the log book.
Invalid task stage Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.

the log book.
IO line Enabled / LPC The IO line is either enabled or disabled automatically If necessary, manually enable/disable the IO
Disabled at card x (loop processor card) or manually. line using the [control] menu.
Loop map has changed LPC The map is different to that previously allocated. Check and confirm difference with backup
card x (loop processor card) map.
Loop n: High LPC High resistance on both lines. Use the Loop Diagnostic Tool to diagnose the
resistance (2Km Loop Processor Card) cause of high resistance on the loop and rectify
it.
Loop n: High LPC High resistance on 0v lines. Use the Loop Diagnostic Tool to diagnose the
resistance on (2Km Loop Processor Card) cause of high resistance on the negative line and
negative line rectify it.
Loop n: Overloaded LPC The loop is overloaded, ie is taking too much current. Use the Loop Diagnostic Tool to diagnose the
(2Km Loop Processor Card) fault condition and rectify it.
Loop n: Reply LPC The named device is at the marginal limits of correct Use the Loop Diagnostic Tool to diagnose the
marginal (2Km Loop Processor Card) communications (timing or level) cause of communication issue and rectify it.
Loop power restored Power supply Normal loop supply restored: -

Normal ADC = 202 (44V).
Value = Vsupp x 1/11X256/5.
Loop Started not LPC As per message. Wait and if it takes longer than
ready at card x (loop processor card) 10 minutes then reset the loop card.
number y loop z
Loop stopped at LPC The loop has been aborted or is still being allocated. Re-allocate the loop.
Card x (loop processor card)


Loop voltage too Power supply The ADC value too high. Check PSU values in the [test/eng] menu,
high/low normal reading is 221. Check fuses and replace
or PSU if necessary.
The ADC value is too low.

Lost Command LPC Lost FAB/SAB. Ignore single occurrence and record in the log
number x Loop y (loop processor card) book.
Lost Device number x LPC There is no reply on ends 1&2 of the device. Check the device connections.
on loop y (loop processor card)
Lost slave Device LPC There is no reply on ends 1&2 of the device. Check the slave device connections and replace
number x on loop y (loop processor card) if necessary.
Magnetic switch Device The reset switch in the base has closed for 3400 Check base and proximity of magnetic field.
operated devices only.
number x loop y

Main program not Any Card Problem with software. The watchdog will operate the Software errors will activate a system reset.
running at MCC / MCB (main control card/board).
card x Ignore single occurrence.
Record event in the log book.

Mains failed / Power supply Failure is detected when the ADC output from the Check mains and fuse. Replace PSU if
restored rectifier is equal to or less than 105. necessary. This should normally equal to 60V to
get a restored message.
Mains too high Power supply The ADC value is too high. Check the PSU values in the [test eng] menu.
Replace PSU if necessary.
Mains too low Power supply Mains supply is too low.
Master alarm Power supply No end-of-line unit seen. Check the wiring to the master alarm circuits.
Ensure EOLs are connected inside the control
oc ADC value is greater than 92 panel if master alarm circuits are not used.
or or
sc ADC value is less than 37
Restored ADC value is 74


Master alarm MCC / MCB The master alarm has been enabled or disabled If necessary, manually enable or disable the
enabled/disabled (main control card/board) automatically or manually. master alarm using the [control] menu.
Master alarm restored Power supply Master alarm fault cleared.
The ADC value should be 74.
Master polling/not MCC / MCB PC or SRI (service request interface) is not Check the wiring
polling at card x handshaking with the control panel
Master Sector MCC / MCB Master sector has been switched ON/OFF. -
Actioned (main control card/board)
Master Sector MCC / MCB Master sector has been enabled or disabled manually or If necessary manually enable or disable the
Enabled/Disabled (main control card/board) automatically. master sector.
Memory corrupt Device FLASH checksum failure Replace the device
number x loop y
Message discarded Network Card Message received that couldn’t be routed or Check the location displayed, try resetting card.
LPC understood.
(loop processor card)

Neighbour ACK Failed - Repeated address Check domain addresses are unique
at card n
Neighbour ACK Invalid TBA TBA TBA
at card n
Network initialised Network Card Successful network map with polled panels. -
at card x
Network Insecure / Network Card There are 3 missing replies in a row on End-2 of the Check the wiring.
Secure at card x controller. Check the error rate.
Network starting at Network Card Communication starting with other connected panels. -
card x
Network wiring fault Network Card Wiring is presumed to be OC between Check the wiring.
at card x panel n and panel n.
New address n at MCC / MCB The new address set has been read. -
card x Network Card


New domain address n Network Card The new address set been read at the particular card. -
at card x
NMI’s missed at LPC Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.
card x (loop processor card)
the log book.
No periodic Any Card Problem with software, the watchdog will operate the Software error will activate a system reset.
interrupts at card x MCC / MCB (main control card/board).
Ignore single occurrence. Record event in the
log book.
No response number x LPC There is no communication with repeat or mimic panel Power-up the repeat or mimic panel.
loop y (loop processor card) software.
No room on NVM card NVM User attempts to backup or save to an NVM that does If there is no memory left then the card 14
(non volatile memory) on not have enough free space located on the Backplane or on
backplane or MCB MCB (Card 0) needs to be initialised

Node double allocated Network Card Two network cards have same address. Keep address unique.
at card x
Node found at card x Network Card Another panel on the network acknowledged. -
Node lost/restored at Network Card There have been 15 missing replies from another panel. Check the wiring or check and reset the panel
card x Network card to restore.
Not enough RAM at Any Card Not enough memory. Reset the card and ignore single occurrence. If
card x necessary replace the card or add RAM, where
applicable.
Nothing found at LPC No devices found on End 1 or End 2. Check wiring of loop circuit.
NVM initialised NVM Memory available verified. -
(non volatile memory)on
backplane or MCB
NVM is not write NVM Read and write is possible to the memory card. Enable protect if required using the [set up]
protected (non volatile memory)on menu.
backplane or MCB


NVM is read only NVM User attempts to write to a hardware write protected Remove the hardware write protect before
(non volatile memory)on NVM writing
backplane or MCB
Panel in/out of MCC / MCB Commissioning mode switched ON/OFF. To manually switch commissioning mode use
commissioning mode (main control card/board) the [test/eng] menu.
Panel Label Set up MCC / MCB Panel label has been set from the menu. -
Panel powerup MCC / MCB Software reset of system or there has been a manual If an automatic reset has occurred then check
(main control card/board) reset of card 0. for system errors.
Pattern number x on LPC Sensor has detected an interesting event eg fire/fault. -
loop y channel x (loop processor card)
Pointer corrupted at Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.
card x
Ignore single occurrence.
Record the event in the log book.
Pointer missing at Any Card Software error Software errors will cause a system reset.
card x
Card fault should be ignored for single
occurrence.
Record the event in the log book.

Prefire number x on LPC Pattern match less than a Fire. -
loop y channel z (loop processor card)
Printer lost/fitted MCC / MCB / DAC / MRC The external printer has not been seen and is ‘lost’. Check the connections to the printer. Also
at card x number y on check for paper jam in the printer mechanism.
loop z
Program memory Any Card Checksum failure on FLASH at midnight. Clear and ignore single occurrence.
corrupted at card x Record in the log book.


Program not running Any Card Problem with software, the watchdog will operate the Software errors will activate an automatic
at card x MCC / MCB (main control card/board). system reset.
Ignore for single occurrence.
Record event in the log book.

Program runaway at Any Card CPU has crashed. Clear and ignore single occurrence. Record in
card x the log book.
Q buffer full at Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.
card x
the log book.
Q buffer number Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.
Failed at card x
the log book.

Radio devices LRT Radio LRT has completed finding all of the radio -
recovered devices
Recover failed at LPC Loop does not match with what is in NVM. Check and confirm/correct the difference and
card x (loop processor card) then backup.
Recover succeeded at LPC Successful recovery after a previous failure. -

Replaced Device Wrong LPC Device is a different type. Check and confirm installation of correct type
type number x on (loop processor card) and reallocate. Back up to memory.
loop y
SAFE Address not Set LPC The replaced device is not SAFE addressed. The Set up the SAFE address.
up number x on loop y (loop processor card) device previously installed in the location was SAFE
addressed.
Scan error number x LPC Invalid universal scan reply. Check loop length and screening
at card y (loop processor card)


Sector actioned LPC Sector is switched ON/OFF. -
(loop processor card)
Sector enabled/ LPC The sector(s) has been enabled or disabled If necessary, manually enable/disable the sector
disabled at card x (loop processor card) automatically or manually. using the [control] menu.
Seeking radio devices LRT Radio LRT is finding all of the radio devices -
Sensor faulty LPC Wireless system - sensor head needs cleaning or Check and replace the sensor if necessary.
(loop processor card) sensor head lost from a wireless base (wireless adaptor)
Also mean - Fault pattern has been matched.
Sensor out of LPC Fault pattern has been matched. Check and replace the sensor if necessary.
specification (loop processor card)
number x on Loop y
channel z
Sensor restored Radio (Plexus) Device A Radio (Plexus) Device head has been restored. -
Shared memory Any Card There is MCC / MCB problem. Replace all other cards first other than the
hardware is faulty at MCC/MCB to see if the problem is resolved.

card x
If it persists then replace MCC / MCB.
Slave Device LPC Slave type device has been replaced. -
Replaced (loop processor card)
number x on loop y
Slave micro failed at LPC Loop driver is watchdogged by loop processor. Reset and ignore single occurrence. Record in
card x (loop processor card) the log book.
Software errors Software errors will activate Software error Software errors will activate a system reset.
a system reset
the log book.
Sounder circuit Device There is a fault with the sounder hardware on the Replace the device
failed S-Cubed or S-Quad.
Sounder circuit Device The fault is on the sounder circuit associated with -
Restored S-Quad or S-Cubed has been restored.


Speech circuit has Device There is a hardware fault possibly associated with the Replace the device
failed voice chip on the speech S-Cubed or S-Quad
Speech circuit Device The fault on the speech S-Quad and S-Cubed has been -
Restored restored.
Spurious Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.
acknowledgment at
card x Ignore single occurrence. Record the event in
the log book.
Spurious FAB number x LPC Device has FAB but shouldn’t have any. Ignore single occurrence as the panel will
on loop y (loop processor card) remove the indication.
Stack overflow at Any Card Software error Software errors will activate a system reset
card x
the log book
Stack too deep at Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.

card x
the log book.
Strobe circuit has Device The strobe circuit in the S-Quad or S-Cubed device has Replace the device
failed failed.
Strobe circuit Device The strobe hardware fault, such as internal connection, -
restored in the S-Cubed or S-Quad has been restored
Sub Faults See exceptions
Superfire number x on LPC Pattern match is equal to or greater than a Fire. -
loop y channel z (loop processor card)
Supply totally Failed MCC / MCB The message does not normally appear. -
Switching inhibited Network Automatic end swapping on the network controller has -
at end 1 at card x been disabled for test purpose.


System Printer fitted MCC / MCB A 80 column serial printer is fitted to the panel. -
at card x number y (main control card/board)
loop z
System Printer Lost MCC / MCB (Printer option) TBA TBA
at card x number y on
loop z
System Restarted MCC / MCB Link on back plane restored. -
/Started (main control card/board)
System stopped MCC / MCB Backplane link moved causing the system to stop. The link should not be normally accessed.
Task stuck at card x Any Card Software error. Software errors will activate a system reset.

the log book.
Test set found / LPC Remote allocation unit has been found connected to the Disconnection of the test set will bring about a
removed at card x (loop processor card) system. removed message.
Too many errors Device More than 15 errors from a device in 34 hours. Check the loop wiring to the device.
number x on loop y
Too many errors x at Network Card Up to 6 consecutive communication errors. Check wiring and cable screen. There may be
Card y faults with the installation.
Two controller at Network There are two network controllers. One network controller will automatically shut
card x down.
Two master has the MCC / MCB / DAC Two PCs have been given the same address. Each PC must have a unique address.
same address at
card x
Unable to claim Any Card System too busy Wait or reset card if stuck, record in the log
buffers at book
card x
Unrecoverable Tx LPC More than 3 consecutive reply errors Check the device connections and replace if
fault number x loop y (loop processor card) necessary.


Voice Alarm comms Panel's Serial Link There is a serial link wiring fault between Vigilon Check the serial link is working, ensure:
failed panel 'Port 1' and DOM/Comprio. Other Vigilon panels ¨ Serail link cable is connected to DOM to
Port 1 / Node x in the connected network will indicate the 'Node' socket TWI
number of the panel connected to DOM /Comprio.
¨ Serial link cables are connected to the two 9
way D Type connectors on the Adapter
TWI-RS232 and
¨ Serail link cable is wired correctly at a
Vigilon/Compact panel to terminals Tx, Rx
and 0V.
Voice Alarm comms Panel's Serial Link There is a serial link wiring fault has been restored -
failed between Vigilon panel 'Port 1' and DOM/Comprio.
Port 1 / Node x Other Vigilon panels in the connected network will
indicate the 'Node' number of the panel connected to
DOM /Comprio.
Voice Alarm common Connected D1 Voice Alarm There is a common fault, that is any fault in D1 Voice Find the cause of common fault at a D1 Voice
fault Node x system Alarm system, for example Speaker line fault, Alarm system:
Amplifier fault, Mains power fault, etc. ¨ Refer to user guides for D1 Voice Alarm

system modules to locate the fault.
The ERROR LED is lit at the DOM/Comprio ¨ Once the fault is rectified the fault message
connected via serial link to Vigilon panel. and notice fault indications are removed at
both Vigilon and D1 Voice Alarm system.
Voice Alarm Configuration fault at a D1 This message and indication is given at Vigilon panel Test for a configuration error which occurs
configuration fault Voice Alarm System of a configuration fault in a D1 Voice Alarm system. when a non existent or not configured properly
Nos. 17 Virtual Output Point is made active.
The affected output (VOP) in this case No 17 is not ¨ Confirm the VOP displayed as being faulty is
recognised. non existent.
¨ Rectify the configuration at Vigilon and/or at
the D1 Voice Alarm system.
¨ Repeat this test to ensure the revised
configuration works. Check to ensure the
fault has cleared.
Warm restart MCC / MCB The 5V rail has seen a dip activating the watchdog or -
(main control card) the button has been pressed on MCC / MCB or panel
power reconnected.


Warning cleared MCC / MCB Warning has been removed. -
Wiring changed - LPC A test has shown a break on the 0V line. The test is Check wiring of 0V around loop.
ground break at card (loop processor card) conducted every minute.
x number y on loop z
Wiring changed - LPC Loop short circuit after the particular device. Check wiring and device after indicated device.
short at (loop processor card)
card x number y
loop z
Wiring changed - LPC No reply received from a device at End-2 of loop. Check wiring.
split/closed at (loop processor card)
card x number y on
loop z
Wiring changed part LPC Less than 80 ohms between the +ve and 0V of loop Check wiring and the device after the partially
short at card x (loop processor card) wiring. shorted device.
number y on loop z
Wrong card type at Any Card Card in wrong slot. Move the cards to the right location.
Card x
Zone enabled / MCC / MCB The zone has been enabled or disabled automatically or If necessary, manually enable or disable the
disabled at (main control card/board) manually. zone using the [control] menu.
card x

Labels
Appendix C - Guidelines for
¨ Labels are given to identify location of areas on a site where products are installed
standalone system commands
Appendix C - Guidelines for standalone system commands

This appendix provides guidance on factors that must be taken into consideration when applying ¨ A previously created label can be modified
"
standalone system functions, such as:
¨ labels Where manual call points are being used then each can only have a label of up
to 28 characters.
¨ sectors (including flag set sectors)
¨ a 32 character label can be assigned to a:
¨ delay blocks
• device
(must have a label having 28 characters if it is an MCP)
¨ time slots and time blocks
• each Input/Output line
(must have a label having 28 characters maximum if one or more MCPs are
¨ zones installed on the input line)
• zone
¨ groups
• group
¨ voice alarm zones • control panel.
¨ command builds Input channel label

¨ A supervisory input channel label of an interface unit will only be displayed at the
¨ sounder configuration control panel of the standalone system.
• By adding an * in front of the channel label it will allow the label to appear on all
¨ auxiliary relays. the networked panels
The networked panels must however be setup to display all events. In this
configuration the label will also be displayed at a network node and Central
monitoring system
• When an interface input is operated the standalone system’s (local) control panel
buzzer can only be activated by configuring the input to trigger a Command
build. In this case the Command build should not have actions
• To activate buzzers of control panels in a network an * must be inserted before

the command build label.

Long labels
Long labels having up to 64 characters can be given to devices and command builds. This is achieved by replacing commonly used words with token values (special codes). Tokenised labels :When
tokens are decoded, a trailing space is automatically added to the decoded word. Likewise when a label is being tokenised, the word must have a space following it, or be at the end of a line. Therefore
a token word cannot be followed with a comma, dash or other such character.
To switch ON long labels: Press the Menu on/Off button -> [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] -> enter your PIN (where necessary) -> <etc> -> [Config] -> <etc> -> [Label] -> [On] -> [Enter].
" All tokenised labels are displayed in Upper case.
Banks 0, 1 and 2 show the list of tokens used by the software to reduce the character label to 32 characters or less.
Bank 0
General Building Features
AREA ANNEXE BLOCK BUILDING
CORE CORRIDOR DOOR DUCT
ENTRANCE ESCALATOR EXIT EXTENSION
FLAT HALL HOUSE LIFT
LOBBY RISER ROOM ROUTE
STAIRS TOWER UNIT VENTILATION
VOID ZONE
Vertical Location
LEVEL MEZZANINE FLOOR BASEMENT
GROUND FIRST SECOND THIRD
FOURTH CEILING ROOF ATRIUM
Geographic Location
NORTH SOUTH EAST WEST
NEAR OUTSIDE ABOVE UPPER
CENTRE LOWER LEFT RIGHT
FRONT REAR
Building Usage
ACCOMMODATION ADMIN BEDROOM BOILER
CENTRAL CHANGING COMPUTER CONTROL
CUPBOARD ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING EXTERNAL

GALLERY GARAGE GENERAL HOUSING

KITCHEN LAUNDRY LOUNGE OFFICE
PLANT RECEPTION RESTAURANT SERVICE

SERVICES SHOP STAFF STORE
STORES SWITCH SYSTEM TOILET
WORKSHOP WARD WAREHOUSE
Airport Tokens
AIR SIDE ARRIVALS BAGGAGE BRIDGE
BUREAU DE CHANGE CUSTOMS CONCOURSE DEPARTURES
DUTY FREE EXCHANGE GATE HANDLING
IMMIGRATION LANDSIDE LUGGAGE MALL
PASSENGER RETAIL SECURITY STATION
TERMINAL TRANSFER
Medical Tokens
MEDICAL THEATRE X-RAY CLINIC
PATIENTS PHYSIOTHERAPY GERIATRICS PAEDIATRICS
RECORDS HEALTH
Components of the Fire System
SOUNDER DETECTOR OPTICAL IONISATION
HEAT INTERFACE BEAM REPEAT
SPRINKLER
Bank 1
CHAMBER FOYER SHAFT STAIRCASE
STAIRWELL
Vertical Location
FIFTH SIXTH ATTIC BALCONY
LANDING PASSAGE SUBWAY TUNNEL
Positions
ADJACENT BOTTOM
Building Usage
CATERING COLLEGE CONFERENCE DEPARTMENT
DISPATCH EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT ESCAPE
MANAGER MEETING PACKING PHYSICS

POINT PREPARATION SHOPPING SITTING

STATIONERY SUITE SUPPLY TELEPHONE
TRANSFORMER
Airport Tokens
AIRLINES BONDED CHECK-IN CLORIFIER

CONVEYOR CUL-DE-SAC DOMESTIC FORECOURT
INFORMATION INTERCONNECTOR INTERNATIONAL RECLAIM
SCREENING SECRET SIGN TRAVOLATOR TRUCKING
Medical Tokens
DISPENSARY
Components of the Fire System
ASPIRATING INPUT OUTPUT PRESSURE
SHUTTER
Bank 2
BLOWER CHUTE DOORS HOIST
ROLLER SLUICE
Position
BEHIND BELOW UNDER MIDDLE
Building usage
BISTRO BUSINESS CANTEEN CHILLER
CLASS CLASSROOM CLEANERS DISABLED
ELECTRONICS FACTORY FEMALE LIBRARY
LOCKER MAINTENANCE MOTOR MUSIC
NURSERY PHASE QUIET SEATING
SHOWER STORAGE TENANT VEHICLE
VOLTAGE WALKWAY
Airport token
APRON AUTOWALK BOARDING CABIN
CONNECTOR CRAFT DEPARTURE FLIGHT
STAND TOUCHDOWN

Sectors ¨ a Sector that is actioned ON will activate its alarm

devices, such as interface outputs, S Cubed, S-Quad and
DAU devices.
a sector can be configured to give one of three signals

* I/O LINES MAY BE SECTORED INDIVIDUALLY FOR STANDARD MAINS POWERED
• Signal 1 Alert (priority 3)
DEVICES
ASSIGN
INTERFACE UNITS AND NOT FOR LOOP POWERED INTERFACE UNITS.
• Signal 2 Evacuate (priority 2)
& I/O LINES
WITHIN A • Signal 3 Continuous (priority 1).
SECTOR * COMMAND
BUILD
SIGNAL ¨ Sectors 1-28 operate automatically with ‘Sound Alarms’

1
and ‘Silence Alarms’ buttons
O N
O
FF
SIGNAL
DELAY
¨ a Sector (any one of 1-28) that is configured for NO
ON 2
DELAY ACTION OFF BLOCK
BLOCK ON
OFF SIGNAL
32 SECTORS
action on ‘Sound Alarms’ button being pressed will be
3
SIGNAL PER LOOP TRIGGER silenced on operation of the ‘Reset’ button
1
NOTE : SECTORS 29 TO AUX

NO
¨ the Sectors 29-32 are independent of the ‘Sound Alarms’

O N
O
ACTION RELAYS
FF
SIGNAL
32 ARE FOR ACTION
ON 2 SPECIAL USE
OFF
ACTION
button and are primarily used for the control of plant
COMMAND ACTION
BUILD
ON
OFF SIGNAL SECTOR equipment. However, the Sectors 29-30 can be
3
SIGNAL
1
SECTOR
configured to normal sector operation
ACTION
NO SETUP THE SECTOR
O N
O
¨ sensors, call points and interface inputs may be assigned

FF
ACTION
SIGNAL TO DE-ENERGIZE ON ASSIGN
ON 2
OFF
SILENCE ALARMS
OR RESET VOICE ALARM
to more than one Sector
ON
SECTOR OFF SIGNAL BUTTON ZONES
ACTION 3
That has just
come into fire
ASSIGN
¨ a loop powered interface is assigned to a Sector and
NO
ACTION
consequently the inputs and outputs lines of that interface
MASTER
SECTOR will be assigned to the same Sector
DEFAULT: SIGNAL-1 = ALERT
SIGNAL-2 = EVACUATE
NOTE : A SECTOR CAN ONLY ACTION OTHER LINKS
IF THE FIRE IS AT A DEVICE ASSIGNED TO THAT SECTOR.
¨ S4 devices having alarm sounder and interface outputs are
SIGNAL-3 = CONTINUAL restricted to one Sector only
NOTE: VOICE ALARM ZONES ARE PUSH BUTTON
CONTROLS ON THE MAIN PANEL.
¨ for Voice alarm panel there can be up to 10 Voice Alarm

Zones
¨ Voice alarm zone are push button switches on the Voice

¨ There can be up to 32 sectors per loop alarm control panel that can be assigned to Sectors
¨ a Sector is a collection of devices on the same loop having a common action ¨ any normal Sector (1-28) can be assigned to any Voice
alarm zone (1-10).

Integral sounder operation

A sensor sounder device can have its integral sounder only actioned in the event of a local fire event being detected at the device.
¨ Integral sounder Sector operation (sometimes also called 'flag set' Sector) can be configured using the panel menu commands [SetUp]-> [Sector] -> [Sounder] -> [On]
¨ when a Sector is configured for 'integral sounder mode' then a fire event from a sensor sounder in the Sector will cause only the integral sounder to operate
¨ linked Sectors are not affected when sensor/sounder type device is triggered from Sector configured for 'integral operation mode', only its local sounder operates and fire is
reported at the panel
¨ Delay Blocks can be configured to action other Sectors from sector operating in an integral sounder mode
¨ Sectors configured for integral sounder mode operation can be setup to action command builds.
NOTE: OTHER SENSOR SOUNDERS

SECTOR X IN AN ÌNTEGRAL SOUNDER SECTOR'
OPERATION OPERATE IN A SIMILAR MANNER
SECTOR X
Sensor
Sensor SECTOR X Alarm ONLY LOCAL
Alarm device ALARM SOUNDS
device
FLAG SET
INTEGRAL
ON - ON FIRE
SOUNDER ACTION COMMAND
FIRE BUILD
Setup
H H
ACTION
DELAY
MCP BLOCK
MCP
INTEGRAL
SOUNDER
FLAG ACTION
OFF
SET OFF SECTOR
DEFAULT
(DEFAULT) INTERFACE
This action is only applicable
INTERFACE
if the fire was from a non
Sensor Alarm device
The sector x will operate normally when

actioned by another sector.

Default fire plan Fail safe fire plan

The fire plan on power up is known as ‘one out all out’. This is when Sector 1 is assigned with all devices ¨ It is advisable to build a fail safe mechanism when Sectoring. If for any reason
of the system. A fire will activate evacuate (signal 2) on all interface outputs and alarm sounders of certain Sector assignments have been lost due to system power down and

S-Quads, S-Cubed and DAU devices. subsequent NVM recovery conflict on system power up, the sounders will still
operate in the event of a fire.
¨ Fixed extinguishant inputs / outputs are automatically assigned to Sector 29. Note the Fixed
extinguishing interface unit is a legacy product and is no longer a part of the product range. ¨ the fail safe mechanism will involve leaving Sector 1 on each loop free from
any device assignment, as any devices that lose their sector assignment will
To assign a default fire plan default to Sector 1
¨ To manually configure the default fire plan using the set up menu:
• Assign all devices and IO lines to Sector 1 ¨ the following action will give an evacuate tone to any alarm sounders that have
defaulted to Sector 1:
• and then action all sectors (except Sectors 29-32) on all sectors to signal 2.
• Action all Sectors (except Sectors 29-32) on Sector 1 to signal 2
To remove the default fire plan. • Action Sector 1 on all sectors to signal 2.
¨ If the system is not intended to operate with the default ‘Fire Plan’, then do exactly the
same as making the default fire plan, but this time replace the [Assign] with [Remove].
Site specific fire plan
Also remove IO lines. ¨ A site specific fire plan can be created by configuring Sectors to site
requirement.
All sensors, call points, sounders and interface lines are now completely separate from each
other.
&
The use of monitored line off a sensor device having MCP is not allowed in the UK.
¨ also [Deaction] all sectors on all Sectors. This will remove any configured Sector actions
¨ a site specific ‘Fire Plan’ can now be set up by assigning devices within common initiation
areas to Sectors and then actioning them together to form the required ‘Fire Plan’.

Delay Blocks ¨ There can be up to 16 Delay blocks per panel
¨ each Delay block can provide a delay of between 4 seconds to 10 minutes

(in 4 second increments) before starting a desired action
ACTION
COMMAND ACTION ¨ a Delay block can action:
BUILD
• Sectors
A DELAY BLOCK
ACTIONED FROM A
SIGNAL
1
• Delay blocks
COMMAND BUILD CAN a
HAVE A SEPARATE SECTORS
DELAY OF UP TO
10 MINUTES ¨ a Delay block may be actioned by:
b SIGNAL
2 • Sectored fire event
SECTORS ACTION
SET UP
• Command build
16 DELAY c
• Delay blocks
BLOCKS SIGNAL
3
PER-PANEL
d
¨ if the required delay is beyond 10 minutes. This can be achieved by a Delay
ACTION
10 min.
I max.
SIGNALS
OFF block actioning another Delay block before the required action is taken
DELAY
BLOCK
a. Signal 1 ON
NO
ACTION " If Delay Blocks are linked to produce a delay of longer than 10 minutes,
then the panel will no longer meet the requirements of EN54: Part 2:1997.
b. Signal 2 ON / from OFF or Signal 1
c. Signal 3 ON / from OFF or Signal 1 or 2
d. all Signal OFF / from Signals 1 or 2 or 3
ANOTHER
¨ where a Delay block is actioned by a command build, a different delay time is
DELAY
NOTE : THIS CONFIGURATION IS POSSIBLE ACTION
set up (within the Command build entry line).
BLOCK
NOTE: IF NO SECTORS ARE SET UP TO BE ACTIONED

BUT THERE IS A SIGNAL NUMBER SET UP AND THE 10 min. max.
ORIGINAL TRIGGER WAS FROM A SECTOR, THEN
WHEN THE DELAY TIMES OUT THAT SECTOR WILL
BE ACTIONED.

Resound Delay mode functions

There are 4 control settings for Delay mode under [Resound]. These settings control what happens to the delay blocks when the Silence Alarms button is pressed.
DELAY
At any time

RESET
Resound
DELAY MODE
setting DELAY DELAY

SilenceAlarms
FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING
[STOP]
1st Fire
Stop – current normal behaviour – the delay blocks are stopped.
Sound Alarms
DELAY DELAY All out

DELAY

Silence Alarms or
[PAUSE] COUNT
DOWN
Cause and Effect
sounders of
PAUSE 1 2 3 4
1st Fire 2nd Fire
CONTINUED
2nd Fire
Pause – the countdown is held at the current position and will continue on the next fire or sound alarms key.
Sound Alarms
DELAY All out

DELAY DELAY

or
COUNT
[TIME] Cause and Effect
DOWN
sounders of
1 2 3 4
PAUSE 2nd Fire
1st Fire Silence Alarms CONTINUED
2nd Fire
Time – the countdown continues in the background and is then held at ‘1’. Then it becomes ‘paused’.
DELAY DELAY

Silence Alarms Cause and Effect
[ACTION] COUNT sounders of
DOWN 1st Fire
1 2 3 4
1st Fire CONTINUED
Action – continue with the delays as if silence alarms hadn’t been pressed.

Sound and Resound alarms options

Resound [FIRE] -> ON / OFF setting
The FIRE ON/OFF setting under [Resound] controls the way sounders operate when a 2nd or subsequent fire occurs after the alarms have been silenced following 1st fire.
Resound FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING

SilenceAlarms SETUP
Cause and Effect
[FIRE] ->OFF of 2nd Fire / subsequent fire
Resound
Cause and Effect
sounders of 1st Fire
[FIRE] -> ON Restores Cause and Effect
of 1st Fire
then
Cause and Effect
of 2nd fire / subsequent fire
2nd Fire /
1st Fire subsequent fire
Resound [SOUND] -> ON / OFF setting

The SOUND ON/OFF setting located under [Resound] controls the way sounders operate on 1st press of the Sound Alarms button during a fire condition after the alarms have been silenced. When set
to ON the sounders will resound and when set to OFF the sounders will perform the standard action of all-out alarms.
Resound FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING
SilenceAlarms
SETUP
All out
[SOUND] ->OFF
Sound Alarms
Cause and Effect
Resound
[SOUND] -> ON Restores Cause and Effect

1st Fire
See also resound delay mode functions.

Time slots and Time blocks ¨ each Time slot has to be given an Enable time and a
Disable time
MAXIMUM OF 15 PER PANEL ¨ each Time slot must be ANDed / ORed to the days of

MAXIMUM OF 16 PER PANEL
ACTION TIMESLOT 1 TIMEBLOCK 1 SETUP week, (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun).
Zone
ENABLE / DISABLE TIMESLOT
COMMAND
BUILD DELAYED BY 0 - 24 hrs
SETUP TIMESLOT 1
¨ when a Time slot is ANDed with selected days, it will
DEVICE NO. = "X"
SETUP only operate on the selected days
TIMESLOT 2 ENABLE STATE 0
ENABLE TIME 08:00

¨ when a Time slot is ORed with selected days, it will be
DISABLE STATE 15
DISABLE TIME 17:00 TIMESLOT 3

TIME DEVICE NO. = "X" Enabled during selected times and will remain ON
SETUP
AND/OR ENABLE STATE 8 throughout the days selected.
DAYS SETUP
AND OR TIMESLOT 4
(BOTH) (EITHER) DISABLE STATE 13
Time blocks
DAYS
MON TUE WED
: COMMAND BUILD NO. "Y" A Time block is used to perform periodic enable disable action on
TRIGGER
THU FRI SAT SUN the system.
¨ There are 0 - 15 Time blocks per panel
A COMMAND BUILD LINKED
NOTE: A Timeblock may contain any multiple Timeslots. TIMESLOT 16 TO A TIMEBLOCK WILL BE
TRIGGERED WHEN THE
A Timeslot may be linked to any number of Timeblocks. TIMEBLOCK IS ENABLED
AND REVERSED WHEN THE
The default is for all the devices to be in Time block 0.

TIMEBLOCK IS DISABLED.
¨ the Time block 0 is always in the Enable state and is the
A Timeblock is enabled if any one of the Timeslots within default for all sensors
it is in the enable state.
¨ a Time block can be linked to one or more Time slots

Time slots ¨ when a Time slot is enabled the time block it is linked to
A Time slot must be linked with a Time block. It is the Time block that perform actions on the system. is also Enabled
" Timeslots do not process when the panel is in a fire condition.

¨ a sensor or interface input can only be assigned to one
Time block
¨ a Time slot can be: ¨ when a Time block is in an Enable state:

• triggered automatically • any sensor(s) linked to it will operate in the Enable
• switched ON / OFF manually state that has been set up
• or switched ON / OFF by Command build • any Command build linked to it is triggered.
¨ it performs an action immediately or after a delay of 0 to 24 hours. ¨ when a Time block is in a Disabled state any Zone tasks
linked to it are also Disabled.
¨ There can be up to 16 Time slots per panel

Zones Groups
LOOP1
ZONE INDICATORS ON THE PANEL (EN system only)
¨ There can be up to 128 Groups
OHS
On
Test/Eng 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Off Zones
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32 ¨ all devices default to Group 1
H DEVICES Flashing
ASSIGNED TO ZONAL MIMIC PANEL
MCP ZONE 4 ¨ all local controller events are in Group 0, ie faults,
ZONE 4 ZONE 1 warning, silence alarms and reset.
INTERFACE
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
DEVICES
OHS ASSIGNED TO
ZONE 5
ZONE 4 ZONE 128
H DISABLE ZONE E NOTE: A DEVICE CAN ONLY BE ASSIGNED TO ONE ZONE
MCP
INTERFACE ZONE E ENABLE
LOOP2
¨ A Zone has a collection of trigger devices that are located in the same general area. It may be used for one or all of
the following:
• for illumination of zonal fire lights on Main panel or Zonal panel or Mimic panel
• are also used for common disablement purposes.
¨ There can be up to 128 Zones per A3 or on A2 zonal mimic panel / 64 Zones per A4 zonal mimic panel, the latter
two panel are legacy products
¨ Zones are used to provide local indication of fire at the main panel and to send fire messages to Zonal mimic
panel, Loop Repeat panels and Repeat indicator panels off main panel.
• integral zonal indicators on a main panel can be configured to give steady / flashing indication of 1st zone in
fire.
¨ Devices from any loop may be assigned to the same Zone
¨ A device may only be assigned to one Zone
¨ Input/output lines of an interface can not be assigned individually to Zones. The interface lines can only be
assigned collectively to a Zone.

Zone Tasks ¨ a Zone task may be used to control the display of fire
DEVICES IN ONE messages, to provide:
ZONE ONLY DISPLAY ALL
INDIVIDUAL
• Common zone label only (this is the default).
DEVICES ASSIGNED
• label of first device in fire

DEVICE LABELS
TO ZONE 'A'
ALL DEVICES THAT GO INTO FIRE
Sensor LOOP 1
WILL TAKE THIS ROUTE DISPLAY TO ALL REPEATS • or all individual device labels.
FIRST ON LOCAL PANEL
Alarm DEVICE LABEL
DISPLAY
¨ a Zone can provide 3-level sensing:
DEFAULT
Sensor
COMMON ZONE
LABELS ONLY
• Prefires
Alarm
TASK NUMBER 1
• Fires
TOTAL OF 128 OUTPUT TRIGGER
TO COMMAND BUILD 'X'
• Superfires.
NOTE: EACH OUTPUT CAN TRIGGER ONE COMMAND BUILD

MCP ZONES w SENSOR x PRE FIRE y FIRE z SUPER FIRE
PER PANEL
TASK NUMBER 2
OUTPUT TRIGGER ¨ sensors can be configured to provide coincidence operation
w SENSOR x PRE FIRE y FIRE z SUPER FIRE TO COMMAND BUILD 'X'
INTERFACE using a combination of all 3 levels if required
ZONE TASK NUMBER 3
DEVICES ASSIGNED 'A'
w SENSOR x PRE FIRE y FIRE z SUPER FIRE
OUTPUT TRIGGER
TO COMMAND BUILD 'X' ¨ up to 8 permutations of fire detection (Zone tasks) may be
TO ZONE ‘A'
configured per zone
TASK NUMBER 4
OUTPUT TRIGGER
OHS w SENSOR x PRE FIRE y FIRE z SUPER FIRE TO COMMAND BUILD 'X'
¨ a Zone task can be made to trigger a command build or a range
TASK NUMBER 5 of Command builds, (this is done in the zone set up menu)
LOOP 2 OUTPUT TRIGGER
H
TASK NUMBER 6
¨ the same Command build can be triggered by different tasks
OUTPUT TRIGGER within a Zone
MCP w SENSOR x PRE FIRE y FIRE z SUPER FIRE TO COMMAND BUILD 'X'
TASK NUMBER 7
OUTPUT TRIGGER
¨ disabling a Zone will disable the sensors within that Zone
INTERFACE switch Sensor / All device w SENSOR x PRE FIRE y FIRE z SUPER FIRE TO COMMAND BUILD 'X'
¨ disabling a Zone via a Time block disables the tasks performed

via TEST/ENG menu
TASK NUMBER 8
OUTPUT TRIGGER
by the Zone
¨ all devices default to Zone 1.

TIME
BLOCK
¨ There can be up to 128 Zones of which the first 64 are for standalone system and remaining zones are for
network use. The number of Zones for standalone system can be re-configured via the commissioning tool
¨ a Zone is a collection of devices, sharing a common label
¨ a device can only be assigned to one Zone

Command Builds • or non-reversible action, (deactioned by another Command

NOT-REVERSIBLE
build for a non-fire trigger or reset for a fire trigger).
COMMAND
COMMAND BUILD FUNCTIONS ¨ the Command build trigger for Zone tasks reside under the zone
ACTION (INPUT) REVERSIBLE
BUILD menu/function
REV OR NOT-REV START MASTER ALARM ¨ Command builds that are triggered through a Sector fire event
MASTER
SECTOR
REV OR NOT-REV STOP MASTER ALARMS
NO ACTION (CLEAR)
1ST will deaction on fire reset. This is independent of whether the
REV OR NOT-REV ENABLE Sector is configured to deaction on silence alarms
CHANNEL
Integral
sounder
REV OR NOT-REV
REV OR NOT-REV
DISABLE
PRINTER
¨ Command builds that are configured for turn Off actions have
REV OR NOT-REV SECTOR no reverse action to turn On again, another Command build or
TIME
TRIGGER REV OR NOT-REV MASTER SECTOR
manual action is required
¨
ACTIONS REV OR NOT-REV FARE
BLOCK
Command builds can be used under fire and non fire conditions
ONLY ONE ACTION FROM EACH COMMAND BUILD

SOUNDER
PASSWORD LEVELS
TRIGGER (INTEGRAL
ONLY ONE OF THESE TRIGGERS FOR EACH COMMAND BUILD REV OR NOT-REV SOUNDER IN to carry out pre-configured actions built up from the Control
1 TO 255 SENSOR/ALARM
DEVICE
I / O INTERFACE
TRIGGER menu command
COMMAND REV OR NOT-REV AUX RELAY
INPUT LINE
TRIGGER BUILD REV OR NOT-REV
TIMESLOT
OVERRIDE
2ND ¨ a Command build can only be set up to perform one action (can
DELAY - TO 24 HR
be a range), any split range would require a second Command
SECTOR
That has just
TRIGGER DELAY BLOCK
build
¨
come into fire REV OR NOT-REV PAUSE SOUNDERS
DELAY 0 TO 30 SEC
ASSIGN
'LABEL' OR NUMBER
UP TO 40 CHARACTERS
each Command build can be given a 40 character label to be
REV OR NOT-REV LOCAL BUILD
Sound
ASSIGN
displayed and/or printed when triggered. If no label is given
REV OR NOT-REV SOUND
Silence
SILENCE
then nothing will be displayed
¨
ASSIGN
Reset RESET if a label is given, the local buzzer will operate for 1 minute
TRIGGER VERIFY
NONE REV OR NOT-REV DIGITAL
when the Command build is active
(CLEAR)
¨ Command builds are logged with an On/Off time, this
BACKGROUND
information can be viewed by selecting [info] -> <etc> ->
REV OR NOT-REV
DIFFERENT
ZONE TRIGGER MUSIC
[Event]-> <etc> -> [Supervis]-> [Log] -> [Enter] and if still
TASK EMERGENCY
MENU REV OR NOT-REV
MESSAGE On via [Info]-> [Event]-> <etc> -> [Supervis]-> [Active] ->
FROM ANOTHER ZONE
REV OR NOT-REV
REV OR NOT-REV
AUX MESSAGE
EMERGENCY MIC
[Enter], this is only possible if a label has been given to the
PLAY MESSAGE
Command Build
REV OR NOT-REV
REV OR NOT-REV
PA
D1 VOICE
¨ when speed of operation is required the lowest number
NOTE: NORMALLY THE
BUILD REVERSE ACTIONS REV OR NOT-REV FARE
Command builds should be used as these are processed first
¨
IS SELECTED.
if a digital output line is to be actioned by a Command build,
"
the I/O line should not be assigned to a Sector as it may
Where possible use sectored action instead of command build action. deaction when the silence alarms is pressed regardless of the
Command build still being active
¨ a fire condition takes priority over a Command build
¨ There can be up to 255 Command builds per panel
¨ a Command build can only be set up with one trigger (can be a range)
¨ a Command build can be triggered:
• for reversible action (automatic deaction on removal of trigger)
& Take great care not to action a digital output to an
input line, as this will effectively disable the input.

Sounders Configuration Number FAB action SAB action
¨ The standard alarm devices of each standalone system can be configured for three 0 no output Turns Off selected Outputs
sound output signals
1 - 10mS pulse on selected Outputs

¨ every 250mS over a 2 second time the sound output can be altered to high, low or off 2 frequency tone 40mS pulse on selected Outputs
tone
¨ sound signal configuration can be altered by modifying the FAB-SAB pairs by 4 On/Off control.(On being low 160mS pulse on selected Outputs
pressing the button Menu On/Off to select [Set-Up] -> <etc-> -> [Modify]-> <etc> frequency)
-> [Signal n] -> [Sounder] -> [Enter] and enter the FAB/SAB for Signal n and press
enter. 5 - 250mS pulse on selected Outputs
6 high frequency tone 350mS pulse on selected Outputs
FABs & SABs
The FAB (first action byte) determines tone and On/Off control while the SAB (second action byte)
determines the action to be performed on the output. 8 - 630mS pulse on selected Outputs
Time in seconds 9 - 800mS pulse on selected Outputs
Factory Default FABs
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.75
SABs A - 980mS pulse on selected Outputs
Signal 3 (Continuous) 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 B - 1.2S pulse on selected Outputs
Output turns on Low
frequency sound C - 1.4S pulse on selected Outputs
continuous every 0.5
D - 1.6S pulse on selected Outputs
seconds.
Signal 2 (Evacuate) 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 E 1.9S pulse on selected Outputs
First output turns on F Turn on selected Outputs
Low frequency sound
continuously, then every
half second the High
frequency output is
pulsed for 250mS.
Signal 1 (Alert) 65 00 65 00 65 00 65 00
Pulses high frequency
for 250mS every half
second.

Auxiliary Relays Radio Device

The two Auxiliary relays in the control panel are defaulted to operate on: A Plexus radio device is bound to a LRT and can be configured using the Plexus Commissioning
• a Sectored fire event the Auxiliary relay 1 and tool in a similar manner to any other system device, however see the following note.
• a fault event the Auxiliary relay 2.

¨ the Auxiliary relays can be configured for normally-open or normally-closed
operation " It is important to note that a Radio sensor device do not have multiple STATES
and therefore a radio sensor device cannot operate with Timeslot, like for example a
¨ the Auxiliary relays may be configured to be operated with: S-Quad sensor where the sensor STATE can be switched at pre defined times of a day.
• a Fault
• a Warning Prior to commissioning radio devices using the commissioning tool ensure they are all
pre-commissioned using the Plexus Pre-commissioning tool.
• any combination of Sectored Fire events
• or any of the above combination
¨ It is possible to delay the operation of each relay by up to 10 minutes after the first
FIRE event. The accuracy of the delay is 0 - 4 seconds
¨ The relay will operate immediately for fault and warning events.

Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE)

¨ There can be one FARE Interface per Vigilon System.
FARE Interface can be a LV Interface unit S4-34420, but can also be a S4-34450. " Where a FARE interface is required to be

Other interface units can be configured FARE, these include S4-34440-02, S4-34440-12, S4-34401 and S4-34404. disabled then use the FARE device disablement
option.
¨ a FARE Interface device is automatically placed in plant Sector 32 (as default) and is unaffected by operation of SOUND
ALARMS control
¨ a FARE Interface device may be switched ON or OFF from the panel menus select:
Menu On/Off button to select [Control] -> <etc> -> [FARE] -> [ON] or [Off] -> [E]
¨ a FARE device may be Enabled or Disabled from the panel menus, select:
Menu On/Off button to select: [Control] -> [Enable] / [Disable] -> <etc> -> <etc> -> <etc> -[FARE] -> [E]
Vigilon loop
Sensor
Alarm
device
SWITCH ENABLED OR
H
ON / OFF DISABLED
MCP
FARE
SETUP ONE LV INTERFACE #

as FARE DEVICE IN A VIGILON SYSTEM ACTION
CAN BE SET UP TO OPERATE AS ALARM RECEIVING CENTRE
FIRE ALARM ROUTING Confirmation
EQUIPMENT (FARE)
LV INTERFACE #
# - LV Interface unit (S4-34420)

Fire Protection Equipment (FPE)

¨ There can more than one Interface configured FPE application in a Vigilon System.
FPE Interface can be a MV Interface unit S4-34411, but can be also be a S4-34415 or S4-34420. " Where a FPE interface is required to be disabled
Other interface units can also be configured as FPE, these include S4-34440-02, S4-34440-12, S4-34401 and then use the FPE device disablement option.
S4-34404.
¨ a FPE Interface device is automatically placed in plant Sector 32 (as default) and is unaffected by operation of
SOUND ALARMS control
¨ a FPE Interface device may be Enabled or Disabled from the panel menus select:
Menu On/Off button to select: [Control] -> [Enable] / [Disable] -> <etc> -> <etc> -> <etc> -[FPE] -> [E].
Vigilon loop
Sensor
Alarm
device
H
ENABLED OR
DISABLED
MCP
FPE
INTERFACE # Duct mounted fire Dampers,

MORE THAN ONE INTERFACE #
ACTION Fixed fire fighting system,
DEVICE IN A VIGILON SYSTEM
CAN BE SET UP TO OPERATE AS
Sprinkler or water spray system
SETUP Smoke and Heat control system or
as FPE FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (FPE)
Hold open device for fire / smoke doors
FPE
INTERFACE # MORE THAN ONE INTERFACE # Duct mounted fire Dampers,

DEVICE IN A VIGILON SYSTEM ACTION Fixed fire fighting system,
SETUP CAN BE SET UP TO OPERATE AS Sprinkler or water spray system
as FPE FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (FPE) Smoke and Heat control system or
Hold open device for fire / smoke doors
# - Can be a MV Interface unit S4-34411 or S4-34415

S-Cubed Mark III or II and S-Quad Sounder function

A S-Cubed Mark III and II and S-Quad sounder element can operate in turbo mode if configured
Speech function during commissioning to provide further 3dB output. The sound outputs are based on the settings
The Mark II or III S-Cubed or S-Quad Speech sounder function is provided by stored messages on of the FABs and SABs at the panel that gives changing levels over 2 seconds duration in 8 time

a flash memory chip within the assembly. The standard flash memory can hold up to 20 seconds of slots. The standard outputs are synchronised with the S-Quad devices, S-Cubed device and 34000
audio and additionally it holds local complex attention tones, such as the bell and DIN signals. sounder devices installed in the same system.
The volume of the sound output can be individually set at the device, note that the sound level
Each signal output from a S Cubed Mark III or II, or S-Quad Speech device consists of an attention should not be set lower than 65dBA at 1m for standards compliance. The system prevents
tone followed by a message. The attention tone can be a local complex tone or a panel tone, such adjustment of volume down to zero. Another feature that can be configured is the soft start that
as the standard 'nee naw' sound. ramps the sound volume gradually to the maximum level set at the device.
Programmable period
normally set at 10 seconds
can be configured up to 60 seconds Turbo and Non Turbo Modes
Attention tone Speech Message The S-Cubed or S-Quad sounder can output in turbo and/or in non turbo modes. The high and low
Standard FAB mappings are used to change the tone output of the S-Cubed or S-Quad sounder. The turbo
or Complex
tone Message n mode outputs a waveform with a basic frequency that is the same as the resonant frequency of the
piezo inside each device. The non turbo mode outputs modulated turbo waveform.
Programmable Programmable
Pre-speech silence Post-speech silence
same as resonant frequency of piezo
Modulated version of turbo waveform

Turbo square wave Non-Turbo square wave
It is possible to reprogram factory set speech messages
Waveforms with basic frequency

Visual Alarm function - Part 23 complaint Turbo high tone Non-Turbo high tone (Default)
It is possible to set the flash rate of devices like S-Cubed Mark III (including S-Quad with VAD)
using the commissioning tool. The flash rate can be set to 1s, 2s or 4s, but only the 2s rate is Turbo low tone - high output Non-Turbo low tone - high output
compliant with EN54-23.
"
Turbo low tone Non-Turbo low tone (Default)
The Equality Act 2010 recommends visual alarms like those offered by
Turbo rich high tone Non-Turbo rich high tone
S-Cubed and S-Quad devices, are installed in protected premises to warn occupants who
are hard of hearing.
Turbo rich low tone Non-Turbo rich low tone
Strobe function (Legacy)

In the event of a fire the appropriate legacy S-Cubed Mark II or I and legacy S-Quad devices when
installed in the system will output alarm signals according to the site specific needs and these can
be Signal 1, 2 and 3. The strobe alarm flash rate is every 2s for signal 1, every 1s for signal 2 and
every 1s for signal 3. The output from these Strobes are not Part 23 compliant.
The strobe flash rate for signals 1, 2 and 3 can be changed using the commissioning tool. The
output flash rates are synchronised with S-Cubed Mark II or I strobe and legacy S-Quad strobe
devices installed in the same system.

S-Cubed Mark I Voice and Sounder mode pluse VAD/Strobe action

¨ S-Cubed/S-Quad operating in tone mode allows selection from a range of low and high frequency tones that are
" The S-Cubed Mark 1 strobe outputs is not
outputted according to FAB/SAB settings, see sounders configurations section.
compliant to EN54 part 23. The S-Cubed Mark 3 Visual

Alarm Devices are compliant to EN54 part 23. ¨ S-Cubed/S-Quad set for Voice mode operation allows selection from a range of tones and messages that span over 10
seconds duration. The tones and messages are those held in respective S-Cubed/S-Quad device.
¨ An S-Cubed device can operate in Tone or Voice Standard Tone

mode dependent on type. Tone 1
10 seconds period
Tone 2
“ Attention tone Speech Message
¨ All S-Cubed in a system can share a common start Voice
“
Tone 15 Std tone or Tone n Message
Tone + Message
volume setting from a range between 16% to 100%
The Speech only Message 1 Tone
sound output. provides voice message Message 2
Tone only
with tone output. “

“
¨ All S-Cubed in a system can share a common soft Message 7 The sequence repeated until Sounder is silenced
start facility, if set the sound output will increment Sounder
the volume every 0.25s from a defined start level to Standard Tone
The Sounder provides Tone 1
maximum output. sound output over a duration Tone 2
as defined by the FAB/SAB “
“
held at the control panel Tone 15 FAB/SAB is output, see Sounders
configuration held at the control panel
Standard Tone
Tone 1
Tone 2
“
“
Tone 7
VAD / Strobe
The VAD / Strobe output is If actioned:
defined by what signal is being VAD:
actioned on the S-Cubed. Signal 1, Signals 2 or Signal 3 will provide VAD output at 1Hz.
Strobe:
Signal 1 will provide strobe output at 0.5Hz
Signals 2 or Signal 3 will provide strobe output at 1Hz.

¨ There can be up to a maximum of 64 Master Sectors per

Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked system panel
commands ¨ a total of 255 Master sectors per network system
¨ they are therefore a collection of:
Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked system commands

The functions explained in this section apply to networked systems. See also guidelines for standalone system.For information • Sectors
on Command build actions across a network, see Appendix C.
• Delayblocks
" When commissioning a network of control panels, ensure the software version is the same across all the
panels. This is also applicable when an existing network is to be installed with additional panels.
• Master Alarms
• and Aux Relays from one or more Systems.
¨ they provide global alarm actions across a network of
control panels
Master Sectors
Guidelines
PANEL 1 NETWORK PANEL 2
¨ Fire Input Sectors must only be assigned to one Master
Sector.
MASTER
ASSIGN ¨ Output Sectors can be assigned to more than one Master
MASTER Sector.
SECTOR 1 SECTOR 2 SECTOR
ASSIGN ASSIGN
¨ Master Sectors can be actioned by a Sectored Fire Event.
SECTOR
that has 255 PER DELAY
¨ a triggered Master Sector can action one or any
just gone NETWORK BLOCK combination of:
into fire SIGNAL
1 ASSIGN • Sector
O
N
64 PER
O
• another Master Sector

F
MASTER
F
SECTOR ASSIGN ALARM

that has
PANEL ON SIGNAL
• Command Build (not locally)
OF
F 2
just gone ASSIGN
into fire ON AUX • Delay Blocks
OF
F
SIGNAL
3
RELAY • Master Alarms
SIGNAL ASSIGN
1 • or Auxiliary Relays.
O
¨
N
COMMAND
O
No
F
if a Sector assigned to a Master Sector has a Fire Event,

F
Action BUILD
ON
OF
F
SIGNAL
2
the Master Sector will not perform any local actions on the
COMMAND Panel in alarm.
BUILD ACTION
OF
ON
F
SIGNAL
SECTOR
¨ if a Command Build actions a Master Sector, the actions
3 ASSIGN will be performed on other panels, but Command Builds
No COMMAND
will not be triggered.
Action
TRIGGER BUILD ¨ a Master Sector must have something assigned to it before
any Master Sector action links can be made to it.
¨ Master Sector Fire Event actions on other Panels can be
stopped by global Silence Alarms.

"
Master Groups
PANEL 1 PANEL 2 Once message passing has been setup for global repeat or mimic
indication, the local panel will also have to route reset messages to other
groups, besides Group 0.
Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked system commands
MASTER GROUP 1
LINK MCC / MCB ¨ Groups within different Control Panels can be assigned to the same
CARD 0 Master Group
MASTER GROUP 2
¨ Global controls can be configured to output/input or both.
MASTER GROUP 3 ¨ Messages and controls within a standalone system do not require any
setting up
RESET OUTPUT MASTER GROUP 4
INPUT
RESET ¨ the Group 0 contains all panel events and fire resets and therefore must
always be assigned to a Master Group.
MASTER GROUP 5
BOTH
MASTER GROUP 6 " The Verify control button is applicable for EN panels only can
operate globally, like the Sound alarms, Silence alarms and Reset buttons.
SILENCE BOTH SILENCE
MASTER GROUP 7 ALARMS
ALARMS
MASTER GROUP 8
¨ There can be up to a maximum of 8 Master Groups per network.

¨ These are a collection of Groups used for:
• selective fire and non fire event message routing within a Control Panel or around a Network
of Panels
• and for routing Global Controls ‘Silence Alarms, Sound Alarms and/or Reset’ to designated
Control Panels in a Network.
¨ Messages can be displayed or printed on Control Panels and Repeat Panels. Messages are routed
on a Card by Card basis, ie:
Card 0 = Panel LCD
Card 15 on Vigilon panel (Card 0 on Vigilon Compact panel) = Panel Printer
Cards 1-6 = Repeats and Mimics panels on Loops 1-6
• Each Card can be configured to display/print All Events (default) or just Fire Events.
Repeat Panels on the same loop will always give the same information.

Appendix E - Cards
Refer to the instruction leaflet supplied with each card.
Appendix E - Cards
WEEE Directive:
At the end of their useful life, the packaging, At the end of their useful life, the packaging,
product and batteries should be disposed of product and batteries should be
disposed of via a suitable recycling centre.
via a suitable recycling centre and in
Do not dispose of with your normal household waste.
accordance with national or local legislation. Do not burn.
Gent by Honeywell reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revisions of changes.
Hamilton Industrial Park, Waterside Road, Leicester LE5 1TN, UK Website: www.gent.co.uk
by Honeywell Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2100 Technical Support : www.gentexpert.co.uk Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2016

Gent PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Gent PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

by Honeywell

Generic Commissioning Instructions

How to configure the 'U' buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 33

PSU LED indications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 31 Panel Buzzer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53

2 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

Password or PIN code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53 Device checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 68

4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 3

Latching fault events - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116

4 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

What you will hear.

4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 5

supply. The power-down should be done in reverse order.

4. Do not use anti-static procedures on live equipment.

6 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 7

A typical commissioning process

Survey the installation Loop device address allocation

Pre-allocate the wireless devices

Continue on next page

8 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

From previous page

Configure the system using the Commissioning Tool

Procedures for Vigilon Compact VA only

Background music and PA microphone – Interface units

A typical commissioning process

Continued on next page

4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 9

From previous page

Final changes to configuration

Configuration data file

10 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

Product Approval and Standards

Product Approval and Standards

Manual Call points

4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 11

Product number Description Standard

S3-VAD-HPW-R S3 VAD/High Perf. White VAD/Red body

S3-S-VAD-HPW-R S3 Sounder/High Perf. White VAD/Red Body

S3-S-VAD-LPR-R S3 Sounder/Standard Perf. Red VAD/Red Body

S3-V-VAD-HPW-R S3 Voice Sounder/High Perf. White VAD/Red Body

Environmentally protected Devices

12 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

Product Approval and Standards

4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 13

LPCB approved S-Quad Sensor with VAD device STATES

(With VAD & Speech) S4-711-V-VAD-HPR

(With Sounder) S4-771-S

Optical & Heat sensor variant - S4-710

(With Sounder) S4-780-S

14 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

S-Quad Sensors (Legacy product range)

Product Approval and Standards

4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 15

LPCB approved S-Quad Sensor STATES (Legacy product range)

LPCB approved STATE Meets ~ EN54 : Part 7 :2000

Optical & Heat sensor variant -

(With Sounder) S4-780

S-Cubed Mark 2 (Legacy product range)

16 4188-856_issue 7_07/15_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

System Fault Vigilon Fire System Sounder

Fire Routing O/P

Voice Alarm Zones

All Zones Clear Zones